/ 4 35 OtSg 1870 SlczJC GERMAN CONVERSATION- GRAMMAR A NEW AND PRACTICAL METHOD OF LEARNING THE GERMAN LANGUAGE BY W EMIL OTTO, PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND LECTURER AT THE UNIVERSITY OF HEIDELBERG, AUTHOR OF THE “FRENCH CONVERSATION- GRAMMAR” AND SOME OTHER CLASS-BOOKS. TENTH EDITION. LEIPZIG & HEIDELBERG. Published by JULIUS GROOS. 1 870 LONDON. PARIS. DAVID NUTT, 270 Strand. A. FRANCK, 67 Rue Richelieu. NEW-YORK. E. STEIGER, 17 North William- Street. MflF“ The Right of Translation and Reproduction reserved. SPROV* Preface to the first edition. Within the last few years, the study of the German language in England has become so universal, that the appearance of another German grammar in addition to the comparatively few that have hitherto been published, will scarcely excite surprise, especially as the book mostly in use with the English student, viz.: »Ollendorff’s New Method of learning German«, is in reality no grammar, but only a book of exercises, affording the pupil no syste- matic and connected view of the grammatical rules, neces- sarily to be observed in German. The difficulties of the language are not removed by Ollendorff’s Exercises, they are simply avoided. However a mere grammar, i. e. an assemblage of grammatical rules, without practical appli- cation, is equally unfitted to satisfy the pupil, desirous not only of comprehending and reading, but also of writing and speaking the language. The present »German Grammar« will conduce to the attainment of all these objects. It is based on the so-called Conversational Method r first applied by the author of this book in his »French: Conversation-Grammar«, which work has met with great success in Germany, and has distinctly shown that this method is the easiest, quickest, and the best calculated to assist the pupil in overcoming the difficulties of a language. This » German Conversation-Grammar « combines the grammatical and logical exposition of the German language with the constant application of the different forms and rules to writing and speaking. The book is divided into lessons, each complete in itself, and containing in systematic arrangement a portion of the. grammar, followed by a German Reading exercise, in which the different forms are applied to whole sen- tences. An Exercise for Translation into German comes next : the lesson being concluded by an easy and familiar Conversation, re-embodying the matter introduced in the previous exercises. IV It is impossible for a more practical method of ac- quiring the art of speaking German to be conceived, than for the pupil to be questioned in German by his teacher on subjects already familiar to him by translation, and for him to endeavour to give a fitting reply. In a short time the ear becomes so familiarized with the strange accents, that the teacher is understood, the tongue at the same time acquiring a fluency, to be attained by none of the other methods. The author’s practical experience in teaching his mother- tongue to foreigners, warrants him fully in making this assertion. The advantage of conversational exercises is evident. Whoever has occupied himself with the study of modern languages, is aware that by far the most difficult thing is, to comprehend the foreign idiom. Accustomed from the very beginning to understand the easy questions the teacher addresses to him in German, and to answer in the same language on subjects already known to him from the foregoing Reading exercise and translation, the learner exercises equally his ear and tongue, and will in a short time be enabled to express his thoughts fluently and correctly in the foreign idiom. The book is divided into two Parts or Courses ; the First Part contains the complete Etymology, that is, the ten parts of speech, considered in their nature and in- flections, including the irregular verbs, with the plainest syntactical rules only requisite for translating the exercises. The Second Part contains the complete Syntax and the more difficult and idiomatical parts of the grammar. This part, as the most essential, has been systematically explained in clear and accurate rules, all of which are illustrated by the necessary examples, and followed by fitting Exercises and German Beading-lessons, both with the requisite words. Free Exercises, Materials for conver- sation and a few German dialogues conclude the Grammar. Lastly, a few specimens of German poetical literature, some of which may be advantageously committed to me- mory, are introduced in the »Appendix«. In respect to the mode of employing this Grammar, the author begs that he may be allowed to offer teachers and pupils a few suggestions. The rules with their examples and the »Words« should be first learned by heart, and V the German ‘Reading Exercise’ read and translated into English. This done, the ‘ Conversation ’ should he read, then the Exercise for translation (Aufgabe) put into Ger- man, and when corrected, written out fairly and gone through again. Finally the ‘ Conversation ’ should he read and committed to memory. The pupil may commence with the Reading lessons and with the easier poems in the ‘Appendix’ as soon as the teacher considers him sufficiently advanced, even though he should not have gone through the whole of the first Part. Heidelberg, September 1856. Preface to the third edition. The favorable reception, the 1st & 2nd edition of the present » German Conversation-Grammar « have met with having assured the author, that the hook is a serviceable one and that the method pursued in it,*) has proved suc- cessful, he has in return thought it his duty, to spare no trouble in giving this book every possible degree of perfection. Several grammatical rules have been embo- died more accurately, the examples in them augmented and arranged in better order, and easy Reading-lessons introduced into the first Part. In the second Part the number of Lessons and Exercises for translation has been increased and arranged in such a manner, that the more difficult parts of the grammar are placed at the end. In short, every Lesson has been carefully revised and im- proved for the advantage of the learner. The pupil who goes through this Grammar conscien- tiously, will find that he is able not only to make him- self understood, hut to understand; of the two by far the more difficult task. A Key, containing the translations of the English Exercises into German, the necessary notes and trans- lations of the pieces of German literature contained in the »Appendix«, and some specimens of German letter- writing, has been published for the convenience of those who are unable to procure an efficient teacher. Further *) See the preface to the first edition. VI the author begs to mention, that he has published a »First German Book«*) for the use of younger pupils who are to acquire a slight practical knowledge of the elements of the German language, before commencing a regular grammatical course. Heidelberg, December 1859. Preface to the tenth edition. The method followed in this grammar and the im- provements made in the preceding editions having been so much approved by the public as to cause it to be adopted by many schools and private families, as ‘one of the most useful class-books’, the author as well as the publisher have spared no trouble to make it as perfect as possible. They flatter themselves that by this new edition, carefully revised and more elegantly printed, it will be found more deserving of the increasing patro- nage it has hitherto experienced, and they trust that it will materially contribute towards promoting the study of the German language in England and America. The author takes this occasion to caution the public against a spurious edition which has been reprinted at Boston from the 5th and 6th edition of the present gram- mar without his consent, and which does not contain the considerable changes and improvements which have been made in this book during the last five years. He begs leave to mention also that he has recently published a little volume: ‘Materials for translating English into German with grammatical notes and a Vo- cabulary,' ’f) intended for proficient learners. When they have gone through the grammar, the use of this little work will certainly prove useful in giving them a great facility not only in ivriting but also in speaking German correctly. The last (eighth) edition having been doubly printed (for the 8th & 9th) the present appears now as the tenth . Heidelberg, December 1869. Dr. Emil Otto. *) 3rd edition 1867. — f) 2nd edition 1869. Extract from u Rochester Daily Union”. Nov. 10. 1865. Heidelberg, Germany. To the American Student Coming to Germany. One of the most difficult questions for the American student to get properly answered, when he is about to start for Europe for purposes of study is, where to find the best place to set himself to work. Many waste a good part of their time before they find they have not been properly ad- vised on this point. It makes a vast difference where the student of German pursues his studies, not only as to the purity of the language spoken, but as to the ability of those who lecture on the topics he may wish to hear .... It is a singular fact, but an undeniable one, that the most difficult thing to find in Germany is a good teacher of the German language. The want of a good system of text books, and the fact of having been instructed orally, and by lectures, renders the native German teacher incapable of fol- lowing a system of instruction that the better disciplined mind of the American student demands. It must not be supposed that German teachers are de- ficient in knowledge. On the contrary their attainments are a matter of wonder. They speak several foreign languages with as much case and fluency as their own. But they ac- quire languages much more readily than the American student, and therefore fail to comprehend the difficulties which a for- eigner finds in their own. They almost invariably use Eng- lish and French methods in teaching their own language, and these do not meet the necessities of the case. I have often had occasion to remark that, until some German lin- guist took the trouble to put himself in the position of the English scholar, and to comprehend the difficulties which the German language presents to the foreigner well enough to perfect a system of instruction adapted to the case, the cor- rect comprehension of the spirit and letter of the German would be the lot of a very small proportion of those who study it. Woodbury’s method, which is mostly used in America, is found to be very faulty, when any one tries to use what they have learned from it in intercourse with Ger- vm mans. The German is not pure, and many of the classifica- tions are wholly incorrect, therefore half the time spent in learning it, is wasted. Ahn’s method is better German, but it is neither systematically nor progressively arranged. Having been perplexed by the defects of the various systems and text books in use for the English pupils, and the want of systematic and thorough teachers, it has been a source of great satisfaction to have found here at the University of Heidelberg, in the person of one of the professors, Dr. Otto, a teacher who has comprehended and solved satisfactorily the difficulties which his own language presents to the foreigner. He has been a close student of languages, and has not only made many interesting discoveries in German, and originated a most useful system of classification of words, but he has so clearly comprehended the spirit of the English language as to be able to adapt his discoveries and classifications suc- cessfully to it. As a result of his researches and studies he has publi- shed a grammar*) for the English student, which, in my opinion, is better than any heretofore published in Europe or America; and I earnestly recommend it to all who wish to learn German. Twelve months’ trial with other Teachers and systems, added to my own experience in teaching, may justify me in speaking on this point with more assurance than I otherwise would. My conviction is that the student will do better to spent his first three or six months in the beautiful town of Heidelberg. No teacher whom I have found can take him on so understand- ingly and so fast as Dr. Otto. His systematic application of the rules and principles of his superior grammar , and his extensive acquaintance with German literature and German history render his instructions invaluable to the student of German Prof. Peck. *) The full title is: German Conversation-Grammar. A new and practical method of learning the German language by Dr. Emil Otto, Prof, of modern languages at the University of Heidel- berg. Tenth Edition. Published by Jul. Groos, Heidelberg. CONTENTS. First Part. — Etymology. On pronunciation. Letters of the Alphabet Pronunciation of the vowel Pronunciation of the consonants On 1 . 2 . 3. 4. 5. 6 . 7. 8 . 9. 10 . 11 . 12 . 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20 . 21 . 22 . 23, 24 the Accent Reading Eexercises rts of speech Lesson. On the definite Article „ On the indefinite Article „ Declension of substantives First declension „ Second declension „ Third declension „ Feminine substantives. Fourth declension „ Neuter substantives. Fifth declension „ Nouns with prepositions . „ Irregularities in the formation of the plural „ On the Genders of Substantives „ Declension of Proper (Personal) Names „ Proper names of countries, places &c. „ Determinative Adjectives . „ Auxiliary Verbs. a b e n „ Second auxiliary. © c t n . „ Third auxiliary. SB e r b e n „ Auxiliary Verbs of Mood . „ On the Adjective „ Degrees of comparison „ On the Numerals „ Regular (Modern) Verbs . Reading-lesson: Slefop „ Passive Voice „ On the Personal pronouns „ Interrogative pronouns Demonstrative pronouns . Page 3 4 7 11 14 16 18 21 23 25 29 32 36 40 43 47 54 59 64 68 73 78 82 85 92 101 107 114 123 124 133 139 140 X Page Possessive pronouns 141 Relative pronouns 143 Correlative pronouns 146 Reading - lesson : ©in teurer unb ein trofjlfetler 149 25. Lesson. Indefinite pronouns 150 26. // Irregular Verbs (ancient form) 154 First Conjugation 158 Reading-lesson: 2)er hungrige Araber 168 27. // Second Conjugation 169 Reading-lesson: $o§ 5 tu§fo’§ $ferb . 178 28. „ Third Conjugation 178 Reading-lesson: 2)te ©rftrtbung be§ ß>lctfe§ 184 29. It Fourth Conjugation ...... 185 An alphabetical list of all the Irregular Verbs 190 30. „ Inseparable Verbs 194 31. It Separable Verbs 199 Compound separable particles . . . . 202 Separable and inseparable Verbs 206 Reading-lesson: 2) er ©iroccosSiöinb 210 32. It Neuter and Intransitive Verbs .... 210 33. „ Impersonal Verbs 216 Reading-lesson: S)te SBtene unb bie S£aube 221 34. „ Reflective Verbs ...... 222 35. ft On the Adverbs 228 Reading-lesson: 3Der bcmfbare ßöwe 236 36. „ On the Conjunction ...... 237 Subordinative Conjunction .... 240 37. It On the Prepositions 251 Reading-lesson: -jerbrocfiene ^ufeifen 258 On the Interjections 259 -Promiscuous Exercises for Translation and Conversation. 1 . 259 Second Part. — Syntax. 38. Lesson. Special use of the Article .... 269 Reading-lesson: 3)a§ boppelte SBerbredjett 275 39. Remarks on the Genitive of Substantives 277 Reading-lesson: $ll:})l)on§ V 281 40. It On the Auxiliaries of mood .... 282 Reading-lesson: ®ie SBörtlein 290 XI IT Page 41. Lesson. Remarks on the use of Pronouns 291 Reading-lesson: (giftet 297 42. If Use of the Tenses of the Indicative Mood 298 Reading-lesson: (Sinige Süge au§ bent Seben £>einrtib’» IV 301 43. It On the Subjunctive Mood .... 303 Reading-lesson: £)te geprüfte Streue 311 44. If On the Infinitive 312 Reading-lesson: £>te geprüfte Streue (Sdjlujj) . 317 45. If On the Participle Present .... 318 Reading-lesson: ^htblidje Siebe 323 46. „ On the Participle Past 325 On the Future Participle 326 Reading-lesson: Ster SOlann mit ber eifernen 93ta§fe 327 47. Remarks on the Adjectives .... 329 Adjectives which govern the Accusative 329 Adjectives which govern the Dative 329 Adjectives which govern the Genitive 331 Adjectives with Prepositions .... 331 Adjectives with a complement 332 Reading-lesson: 2)er 9Jtcmn mit bcr eifernen 2tta8fe (©cblufe) 333 48. „ On the Government of Verbs .... 334 I. V erbs which in German govern the Nominative 334 11. Verbs which in German govern the Dative 335 III. Verbs which in German govern the Genitive 338 IV. Verbs governing certain prepositions . 341 Reading-lesson: ©betmütfjige $rcunbfcf)aft be» beutfdjen $aifer§ $arl’§ V. 342 49. If Remarks on the Prepositions .... 343 Reading-lesson: ßucct§ $ranact) 353 50. „ On Construction ...... 355 On the principal or simple sentence 355 Reading-lesson: $£>er eble Officer . 358 On the Inversion 359 Accessory sentences 361 Reading-lesson: S)er eble Officer (Sortierung) 362 51. If On the compound sentence .... 364 Co-ordinate compound sentences 364 Compound sentences with subordinate clauses 365 Reading-lesson: 2)er eble Cfftjter (er $nabe unb bie Datteln. 5. 3Der §ifd)er. — 6. SE>er toeifje §irfdj. — 7. ^Xefop. — 8. 2)et SBItnbe unb ber Safjtne. — 9. 2)ie ©cfyatjgräber. — 10. 5£>er üteifenbe. 11. 5£)ie XabofS^fctfe. 2. Sieber unb ©legten 403- 1. 2>er ©äjütje. — 2. ©efunben. — 3. ^erBftlieb. — 4. 2Bin= terlieb. — 5. ©djtbeitjerlieber. — 6. ©c^Iaf ein, mein ^erg. 7. SBäcfjterruf. — 8. $>e§ 5£)eutfdf)en Slaterlanb. — 9. $8abiftf)e§ 3Solf§lieb. — 10. ©ebet ibäfyrenb ber ©d)Iarf)t. — 11. ©legie in ben Ruinen be§ ^eibelberger ©djloffeS. 3. Scgenbcn, Oiontanjen unb 33aÜaben .... 412- 1. SSarbaroffa. — 2. S)er ©anger. — 3. 2)er ©rlfönig. — 4. 5£>er reidjfte f^ürft. — 5. 2lnbrea§ $ofer. — 6. S)a§ Sieb üom braten 9Jlann. — 7. $)ie S3ürgjcbaft. — 8. S)er 9Ung be§ 5ßolbfrate§. — 9. $oluntbu§. 4. Scfjtgebidjte 427- 1. 2)ie Hoffnung 2. fragment au§ bem „Sieb bon ber ©lode" . 5. 2>ramatif(Jje Fragmente 433- 1. 9lu§ ©fitter’s ,,9JIaria ©tuart" 2. Monolog au§ „SBilfjelm SteE" 3. 2lu§ ©critter’s „Jungfrau bon Orleans" Page 369 374 383 386 389 392 393 403 412 427 -433 427 427 -443 433 438 441 GENERA NB. The figures A. 9lb, separable prefix 200. aber, fonbern, allein 237. About, how rendered 349. Above, how rendered 349. Accent of words 11. Accessory sentence, its arrange- ment of words 361 ; with separ. verbs 203. Accusative 329 ; governed by pre- positions 44, 251, 253; — with the infinitive 316; governed by adj. 329. Active verbs 114. Adjectives determinative 68...; demonstrative 68; interrogative 69; possessive 70; indefinite 70; predicative 92; Declension of adj. with the definite article 93; with the indef. article 94; without either article 96. Com- parison of adj. 101; government of adj. 329; with prepositions 331; adject, with suffixes 98; adj. used as nouns 99. Adverbs, of place 229 ; — of time 229; — of quantity and com- parison 232; — of affirmation and negation 233; — of inter- rogation 233, order 234 ; — their comparison 103, 234; their po- sition in a sentence 355; in- version of their position 360. All, with the article 71; without it 273; meaning »whole« 294. 2111, when not declined 294. 2llletn, as conjunction 237. 2tl§, conjunction 240, 241. 2115 toemt, al5 ob, 246; followed by the subjunctive mood 304. 21n, separable particle 200. L INDEX. refer to the page. 21n, prep, its significations 344. 5lnbertf)alb, used for jttieifljalb 112. Amy, how rendered 153, 296. Apposition 62. Arrangement of words 76, 355 .. . Article, the definite 18 ; the indef. 31 ; contracted with prepositions 45; special use of it 269; its repetition 271 ; its position 271 ; when omitted 272. As as, how rendered 104. At, how rendered 349. 21uf, pref. 200; significations 344. 2(u5, pref. 200; significations 345. Auxiliary verbs: Ijaben 72, fein 78, toerben 82; aux. of mood 85, 282; infinitive of the auxil. of mood used for the past parti- ciple 90. B. 93alb, its comparison 103. 93et, significations 345. SBeibe, with and without the ar- ticle 71, 273. By, how rendered 350. C. Cardinal numbers 107. Comparison, of adjectives 101. „ of adverbs 103, 234. Compound words 12; gender of comp, nouns 57; comp, verbs 99; comp, prefixes 202. Compound sentences 364. Conjugation of regular verbs 117 ; — of irregular v. 156. Conjunctions, coordinative 237; adverbial 238 ; subordinative 240, 246; relative 248. XIV Contraction of sentences 355. Correlative pron. 146. D. 2)a, conjunction 240 & 242; con- tracted with prepositions 187. Somit, conj. with the subjunctive mood 304; demonstr. contract- ions 137. Sojs, omitted 308. Date, how expressed 111. Dative, governed by prepositions 44, 251, 253; by verbs 335; governed by adj. 329. Declension of articles 18, 21; of nouns 23 — 42 ; of proper names 60 — 66; of adjectives 93 — 98. Demonstrative adjectives 68. Demonstrative pronouns 140. Determinative adjectives 68. Diminutives, their declension 27; their gender 56. Do, as auxiliary 90, 118, Note 2. Surd), significations 345; sepa- rable & insep. prefix 206. dürfen, its conjugation 89; re- marks on it 288. E. (Sin, indef. article 21 ; numeral 108. ©inanber 150. ©§ giebt, rendered »their is« 217. ©§ ift, rendered »there is« 217. P. Feminine nouns, declined 36. From, how rendered 350. $iit, significations 345. Future-participle 326. G. ©e, as a prefix of nouns 56. ©e, as prefix of the past participle 116; omitted 121, 194. ©egen, significations 346. Gender of nouns 54. Genitive of substantives 277 ; ex- pressed by oon 279, used with the present participle 319, gov- erned by prepositions 253^ by verbs 338. ©ern, its comparison 234 & foot' note. Government of adj. 329; — of verbs 334 — 342. ©rofj, its comparison 103. ©ut, its comparison 103. H. Robert, paradigm 74; used as aux- iliary 117, 157, 195, 223. £od), before a noun 98; its com- parison 103. I. Imperative mood 309; the past participle used for it 326. Imperfect tense, its use 299. Impersonal verbs 216. $n, significations 346. In, how rendered 350. Indefinite article 21. Indef. num. adj. 70, 151; — pro- nouns 150. Indicative mood, use of it 298. Indirect questions 139 Note & 307,. Infinitive, used as substantive 312; without 31t 313; with 311 314; in the passive voice after »to be« 314, Note; with urn — 3U 315; with the accusative 316; after »how, what where &c.« 316; its place in a sen- tence 355, 3. Interjections 259. Interrogative adj. 69 ; — pron. 139. Intransitive verbs 210; with the auxiliary fein 211 & 212. Inversion of sentences 359. Irregular verbs 154. Irregularities in the plural 47 — 52. J. 3e - befto 246 & 105, 10) & 209, 4.. XV K. können its conjugation 85; re- marks on it. 282. L. Stiffen, significations and its use as an auxiliary 285. List of the irreg. Verbs 190. M. Sfllcnt, indef. pronoun 150. Measure, expressions of m. 278; adj. of m. 829. 5Diögen, its conjugation 88; re- marks on it 283. Moods, use of the indicative 298; — of the subjunctive 303; — of the imperative 309. 901iiffen, its conjugation 87: re- marks on it 286. Gutter, its declension 38. N. 9la<$, significations 346. 9lafje, its comparison 103. Neuter verbs 210; with the aux- iliary fein 211. Nouns with prepositions 43 ; their gender 54; declension 24 — 52. Number, expressions of n. 278. Numerals, cardinal 107; ordinal 110 . O. Object, its place in a sentence 356. Oblique narration 307. Of, as sign of the genitive 279. On, how rendered 351. One, after adjectives 108, 152, 2. Ordinal numbers 110. Over, how rendered 351. P. Parts of the speech 16. Passive voice 124; its infinitive after the verb ‘to be’ 314. Past participle, used as atljective 129; instead of the present p. 326; used absolutely and for the imperative 326; its place in a sentence 355. Perfect tense, its use 299, III. Personal pronouns 133. Pluperfect tense, its use 300. Plural, irregular formations 47-51 ; nouns with two forms of it 50, V. Possessive pronouns 141. Predicate of sentences 355, 359, 361. Predicative form of adjective 92. Prefixes, their accent 12; insepar- able 121, 5), 195; separable 200; in accessory clauses 203, Obs.; separable and inseparable 206,3. Present participle how rendered 118; used as adjective 318; as noun 319 ; with possessive adjec- tives 321; used absolutely 322. Present tense, its use 298. Prepositions, with the dative 44, 1 & 3, 251, 253, 4); with the accus. 44, 251 ; with the geni- tive 45, 253; with the dative and accusative 253; contracted with the article 45; contracted with pronouns 137, 145; re- marks on prepositions 343. Pronouns, personal 133; reflective 133, 137,291; contracted with prepositions 137, 145; interro- gative 139; demonstrative 140; possessive 141; relative 143; correlative 146; indefinite 150; remarks on use of pronouns 290. Proper names of persons; their declension 59 — 62. Proper names of countries &c. 64. Q. Quantity, adverbs of 232, 4). R. 9tedjt fjaften 80. Reflective pronouns 133, 137, 291, Reflective verbs 222. Relative pronouns 143, 5). S. ©ein, paradigm 78; with the past XVI participle 129; used as auxili- ary 211. <£elb[t, 137, 150,3). Self, its compounds, how rende- red 137. Sentences, principal 355; acces- sory 361; compound 364. Separable verbs 199. Separ. & insep. verbs 206, 3). (Sie, as pronoun of the 2d person 134. , $ = h hah. u, U = n 00. 3, = i ee. SB, t) = v fow (fou). 3, i = j yot. SB, to = w vey. «, i = k kah. X, l = x iks. s, i = 1 ell. 9r b = y ypsilon. m = m em. 3, h = z tset. Of these, e, i, o. u, tj are simple vowels, the others are simple consonants. Besides these, there are in German double vowels , modified vowels, diphthongs and compound consonants: Double vowels. Sla, act — ee. — 00. Modified vowels. Sic, % ä. Oe, 0, Ö. lie, Ü, it. Diphthongs. Sit, at. (£i, ei. ©it, eu. Slu, au. e>J- Steu, tu, ou. Double and compound consonants. s . ©&, <$, ch. — cf)§ = X. far Sp- ©<$, fd), sch. — ct = ck. — ff, ft, SS. ©t, ft, St. Ou, qu, qu. — ng = ng. — $ = tz. 21), tl) = t. 1* 4 Pronunciation Several of these letters are very like; we therefore recommend them to the attention of beginners, as they may easily be confounded with each other. To prevent such mistakes, we give them here: $ and d and (§; 91, 91 and © and ©. ft and ft; f and f; ft and ft; x and j. Pronunciation of the vowels. 1. Simple and double vowels. % tt. a has always the same sound, and is pronounced like a in the English words: farthing , father , aunt , are; never like a in ball, name or hat. Ex.: aft, ftafte, 9Iffe, 9ttann, 23ab, la=ften. 9(tt, aa is pronounced in the same manner, but longer: 9la§, ftaar, §aar. ($, e. e has two different sounds, but both may be either long or short. 1) The broad e is like a in the English word share: ber, mer, e§, ge=ften, 9Jteftl; — short as in the word shell: pell, foenn, (£n=be, (knte, leftt, gelb. 2) The acute, sound like the French e and the ey in the words they, grey or in hate, as: eften, 9teft, geftt, leftrt, (£=fel (in the first syllable). This is also the sound of the double ee, as: ipeer, 9)?eer, Kaffee, ©ee=le. Except: leer {empty) and Sdjeere {scissors), which sound like lair and share. When the t is followed by two consonants or a double one, it is considered to be short; this being the case with all the vowels. — c at the end of a word or in an unaccented final syllable, is very short : fte=te, SDed e, (Elle, ©telle, fteHen, loftte. 3, i. $, i has only one sound, the same as in field, sister, milh, never like i in wise: in, im, immer, mir, Sippe, milb, Slifd), $inb, IC. — This vowel appears in some words lengthened by e mute after it, as in field: bie = dee, pier (here), bier (four), Sie=fte, SBien, ®ieft, bieder. In some words however the letter t belongs to the first syllable and e to the following ; in this case i and c of the vowels. 5 are of course pronounced separately: (Spanien = Spa= nt=en, Silie = §i=li=e (three syllables). — This does not take place in the final syllable of foreign words, where the accent falls on the last syllable: 9DWobi'e = me- lodee; §armoni'e. 3, i is also made long by the insertion of |j mute, m the five pronouns: itjn, ifym, fijre, ipnen, 3$r. ©, o. ©, 0 when long, has the sound of the o in the Eng- lish words stone, alone: Ofen, §of, 23oben, 9tof)r, S^ofe, h>3. When followed by two consonants, it is short, and sounds nearly like the English o in off, loss: (Sott, fommen, foil, offen. — Double 0 (oo) is always long and has the first sound ö: 2oo§. tt, u. Tt, U sounds in long syllables like the English u in rule, soup, or the oo in food: 33lut, iput, nun, IRupe, rufen; a little shorter, when followed by two consonants, as in full: M, 23unb, §ulb, §unb. — Double u does not occur. % t>. \) appears as a simple vowel only in foreign words, where its sound does not differ from that of the t, as: (£ppern, 2pfta§ zc. — Preceded by e, it will be mentioned with the diphthongs. The German t) is never used as a consonant. 2. Modified vowels. The vowels Ü, Ö, Ü are properly speaking simple ones as well as the foregoing ; but as a peculiar character for them is wanting, they are represented as modified a, o and u’s, and printed with a small e above, as a, Or U or ä, ö, Ü. At the beginning of words the capital letters, are either modified or followed by the e, as: Ä or $le, »» ?? ©, Of, It, tie. — In writing, the e over the small letters has been corrupted into two dots, as ä, Ö, it, which has now also obtained in printing. 5(c or $(, ii. The sound of this vowel, when long, is nearly the same as in fair (the French e), as: $äfe, grämen, Ääber, tüäplen. — When short, the sound becomes rather slender, as in ivere, as : gölte, Mte, 23ätbe, §anbe, $pfet or 51epfe(. 6 Diphthongs. £>e or £>, 5. When sharp, this vowel approaches the English sound in hut or come ; it is very like the French eu in sent or jeune, as : ipölle, öfter, (Götter, formen. — When long, there is no sound answering to it in the English language; the nearest to it is perhaps bird, heard etc.; it resembles the French eu in feu, as: Oefen or Öfen, $öf)Ier, §öf)le, öbe, 33ögen. Ile or 11, ü. The English have nothing corresponding to this sound. It is exactly the French u in russe, sur etc., as: Uebel or Übel, über, |mte, führen, füllen. 3. Diphthongs. at. 5lu, au. % eu or $fa, au. $(t, which occurs only in a few substantives, is pro- nounced almost like the English i in fire, shy, but a little broader, the tt predominating: $aifer, 20aife, §ain, DJlot, 9ftain. — at) is no longer used in German, except in a few proper names. *it, like the ou in house, sound, as: §au3, $aum, tftaum, glau=ben, faul. $(eu, äa, resembles somewhat the English oy in boy ; but whilst here the 0 predominates, in the German fttt the ä is more heard; again the second half is not so open as t, but more like the it (French u), as: §aufer, 23äume, träumen, Bräute (as if spelled §äüfer, iöäüme). ®t, ei (et)). ®t has always the sound of the English i in mind, as: mein, bein, 23ein, Hein, Meinte, (»eilen, ©i, Osier.*) et) was formerly used instead of et at the end of words , and in order to distinguish the two different words of the same sound: feilt (his) and jctjlt (to be). This practise is now abolished, and all words having the sound et are mostly written ei, as: einerlei, Osi, Osier, bei, behlegen. — The further practice of writing the verb jet) It (to be) in all its forms with t) is gradually beeing discontinued. *) This diphthong ei is not to be confounded with ic (long i) which is not a diphthong (see p. 4, i). Compare the two words: b einen and bienen (=bincn); 2Ö ein (i wine ) and 20ien {Vienna). Consonants. 7 <§u, eu. (§H, CU has the same sound as ält; it is not quite so broad as the English oi, as: neu, Sente, fjeute, treu. Pronunciation of the consonants. 1. Simple consonants. 33, B and B, as in English ; but when they end a word or even a syllable followed by another consonant, they are somewhat harder and approach the sound of $ and t: 23all, 33irne, Breit, ab, ©haB, ©IBe, aB=legen; ®amm, ber, milb, 5lab=Ier, $inb=leiu, 9lBenb. ©, C. This letter by itself, appears only in foreign words and is pronounced, before a, e, i and like ts (the same as 3), as: ©afar, ©ent=ner, ©itrone, ©t)pern; — before the other vowels and consonants, hard like f, as in: ©ato, ©oncer't, ©bin (Cologne), ©ultur, ©laubiu», ©clabe. g, f; 8, 1; 9JI, nt; 91, it; ty; %, t and X, | are quite the same as in English, as: finben, auf, 5lffe, frei; Siebe , loBeu, falleu, fiel, gälte; 9Jhmu, mir, im, jammer, uimmt; Stafel, Srautn, Sett, Betreffen; datier, 3tje, ©^empel. t in words ending in ioit, which are taken from the La- tin, sounds like 3 (ts), according to our pronunciation of this language, as: Seftiou = Sef^ion, portion == Spotjiott, ©migration ic. G' ought always to have the hard sound like the English g in garden , glad , pig , as: ©tarten, geBett, gegeu, ©fia§, fragen, glagge, Serg, geuug; — except in the un- accentuated final syllable tg, where it sounds like id), as : $önig, giftig, gütig, meuig (= $önidj, giftid) :c.). It must however be mentioned, that in a part of Germany the ß after each rowel is pronounced soft, sound- ing like 6) (see that letter p. 8): legen = leedjen, Sage = Saa=d©e, geuug = genu$, ^eibelBerg = §eibelBerd) *) ß with an 11 before it (itß) see p. 9. §, 1), at the beginning of words, is aspirated as in English: IfaBen, §elb, f)ort, Ijören, §ut, Ifunbert. — Between two vowels the aspiration is so slight as to be scarcely heard: §öf)e, feljen, ©d)utfe, Blitzen, gieren. — Before a con- sonant and at the end of words it is mute, but it indi- *) This practice however is not to be recommended. 8 Consonants. cates in this position that the vowel before it, is long: ef)=ren, 3äl)ne, ©irofj, Hfjr. 3, i (y°t) corresponds with y (consonant) in you , as : 3a, 3a^r f jeber, jung, 3ube, be=jal)rt. i is like the English h, as: faf)I, fait, $reu<$, $Iee, halfen; it is never mute before tt, as: $nte, $nabe. $t, t is pronounced shriller and with more emphasis than in English. Its being placed at the beginning, middle or end makes no difference: 9ftab, Ühtfjm, (£rbe, bergen, 23urg, fjer, §aar, Slur, giiprer. 0, f, § is like the English s, and the distinction between hard and soft s (like z) is rather imaginary.*) Of course, double s (= jf) is still harder and more hiss- ing than a single s, because the sound is doubled, but the fundamental sound of s should be always hard and hissing: ©of)n = sohn (not ^ohn), ©aft, ©egen, ©uppe, ber §afe, 23efen, $efang, ^famnten, alfo, sperfort' zc. 8 is used at the end of words and syllables: ($)Ia§, (Ban3, §au£, ©lct3d)en, §äu§cf)en (= <$lä§*cfjen, §äu3=d)en). SI, ti. The sound of this letter is the same as that of the German f, as: bon = fon, SSater, berdoren, Setter, btel, grebel, ©dabe. SB, ui answers to the English and French v, but is somewhat more open, the lips being less contracted than in pronouncing the English v. This sound requires par- ticular attention: Skin = vine, tuer, toann, too, toilb, etbig. to is never used at the end of words. 3 , J is pronounced as ts in gets or tvits, as: ^eljn, gu, baau, 3 tuet, 3 af)I, 3 oII, anjie|en. The sounds of the English j, w or wh and th do not occur in German. 2. Double and compound consonants. «, Ö). There is nothing, corresponding to this in English. It has two different sounds: 1) When placed after it, 0, U and a«, its sound is a guttural one and resembles the scotch ch in Loch. It is impossible to de- *) It is only since the French language has been generally studied in Germany, that the soft s has been employed by the higher classes, which is quite foreign to the people at large and found mostly in northern Germany. Double consonants. 9 fine it clearer. The pupil must therefore refer to his teacher for the correct pronunciation, as: 23acf), ladjen, 2o<$, lochen, 23ud), $ud£)en, audj, Dtaucf). 2) The other sound which occurs after t, i, t\, Ü, Ö, ÜU, eu and ii, and after any consonant is a soft “ pa - latic aspirate ”, as: id), Sidjt, reicf), redfjt, 23Mje, Södjer, räu= djern, t)eu=djelu, 23üd)er, toelcfje, §äub=d)en. At the beginning of words 61) is pronounced like as : ©fjrift = £rift, Gljrifiian, ©fjor. When cfj is followed by § or f, they are pro- nounced together like Jcs or x, as : = 20af§ or 20a£ ; thus: Cdf )§, Oc£)fen, gud)§, giidjfe, 2lc()fel, machen. This however cannot he done in compound words: ttmcfjfam = toadjHam, ttadjfu^ert = uacfj=fucf)en, nad)=fe|en, burc()=fe]()en , — or when the 8 is abridged from e§, espe- cially in the Genitive case: be» 33udj§, for 33udje3 or 33udf)’3; be§ 0ad)§ for Qacjjeg or Qaä)»; er jprad)’§. tf appears at the end or in the middle of a word after a short vowel with the sound of a double f, as in English, as: ©tod, Sßacf, ©tetfen, ®locfe, beiden, brüdert; — (f is never allowed after a consonant. To write ftard, SBercf, 23ancf ic. would he incorrect; they must he spelt: ftarf, 2Berf, 33an! k. There are a few compound words in which even tf and f occur together, as: 9tiid=fef)r, Qrucffofteu, Qiiffopf. itg sounds like the English ny in long , as : lang, Sfting, (Sefang. — The same pronunciation is retained, when ng is followed by a vowel, as: lange = tang=e (not lan=ge), fangen, $tng=er, bringen, fingen, gelungen. — In compound words, when the first ends in It and the other begins with g, each is pronounced separately, as: an=genef)tn, an=gefang=en, Un=gebulb. £lU, qu ; q is always joined with tt; together they have then the sound of fU) as in the English word quire. In German qtt is found in few words only: Quar$, quer, Quirl, Qual, Quelle. ff or ft*); the former is used as double s in the middle of a word, the latter is the final double s (not 2 ) *) This letter is not compounded, as it appears in print, of I and 3, but of f and 0 (final s) = fg; it sounds like ss (not sz ). 10 Double consonants. at the end of words and syllables: laffen, beffer, müffert ; — baft (= dass) , §aft, ©cftloft, muft=te. W' vi) has the same sound as f, and occurs mostly in words of Greek origin: (£pfteu, ^ftilofoftftie, (Seograpftie, 9(bofyft. m , vf. Here the two letters ft and f are united in one sound, uttered with compressed lips: Sßfaftl, $fei(, Slftfel, ^pferb. !•») like the English sh in ship, as: ©if) iff, fd^af- fen, 23ufcft, 9lfort, Sanbmann zc.; — hut all combinations of inde- pendent words used by themselves and conveying an idea. Thus : An fang {the beginning) is a compound word as well as gifd)'fcmg, the first consisting of the two words an (preposition = at) and gang; the latter of gifcp and gang. This definition is the key to all the difficulties, which as yet could not he resolved by the two theories adopted by grammarians, one of which says: The radical syllable of a word always takes the chief-accent’; the other: ‘it must he taken by that which has most meaning and sig- nification’. Both principles are deficient, as seen above in the word Anfang. Here the radical syllable is fang, yet it does not hear the chief-accent, which lies on 51 n; Accent. 13 nor is the first syllable, which does bear it, that which has most meaning and signification. 8) Compound words may consist of substantives, verbs, adjectives, pronouns, adverbs, prepositions, the prefixes mif;, un,*) or the final syllables: bar, tjaft, ling, fal, fcfyaft, nijs, fam, tfyum, I ein , et, §eit, atf) and utf),*) the accent of which is somewhat less strong. For all words thus compounded the following is the principal rule : Each component keeps its accent , even when combined, on its radical syllable. Hence it follows that every com- pound ivord is pronounced with two or more accents acccording to the number of components. Euphony how- ever requires, that the latter loses something of its value and weight, so that the first receives rather more stress. This has probably been the reason why other gramma- rians have adopted a full accent and a demi-accent , ^ as: §oft^)6r, S56rf)of, Eingang, Mittag, Radjridjten, uriftdjer, 6fen= tof)r, Regenbogen, fürdfibdr. Note. It must however be observed that compound particles have only one accent, viz. on their second syll- able; as, for example, compounded with fyin: Ipndb, ipnatif, IjtnauS, fytnetn, Ipn^u. with ^er: f)erdb, Ijeraüf, IjerauS, fjeretn, fyer^u, Ijerürn, umtje'r. with ba: bamft, bärtn, bagu, baOön, bdrauS, ba^tfc^en :c. with ju: gürüd. Promiscuous examples. Dftltnnb, (Ö jbftnnb) , Munb=f6d), Ruftrdg, geiftrefd), Mü= Xefb , Rbtfybürft, Umgang, Männlein, greünbfdjdft, RüSfüljr, 3ulfinft, frudjtbar, gml)ett, Jungltng, Sdbfal, Rflmdd)t, gmfter= nt| 3 , mftlefbig, auflpren, bemtfietben, Ipnauffdfjren, fjemntommen, umgartgltd;, aüögefüf^rt, güfunftig , Jünglingsalter, Rei'dfiljum, Refdfilpimer, baufällig, Rbenbrotl), Itebfofen, Rberglaiibe , tobeS= mfitlpg. Räuberei, ©onnenfdjetn, Üljrenfdylüffel, gebermeffer, gelb^üg, gelb^edgmetfter, fc'egS^dljldmt, Unübertrefflidjfelt, Stebensmürbigfelt, Maulbeerbäume, 5 ujdnimen=tömmen, ungerecht, gurüdfeljren, ba^mlfc^endegen. *) All antiquated words. 14 Reading Exercise. ite i?tMtc unb bie ®att-be. The hee and the dove. (£i-ne bur-ftx-ge $ie-ne f wel-dje gu et-rter Ouel-le A thirsty bee, which to a well l)in-ab-ge-ftie-gen nmr, urn jit trin-fen, ttmr-be non bent descended was, in order to drink, was by the ftro-nten-ben ÜBaf^fer fort--ge^rif^fen, nnb nm-re streaming water carried away and was kt-imlj-c er-trun-fen. 6i-ne $au-be, roel-dje bic-fe3 nearly drowned. A dove which this be-merf-te, frid-te ein Saum-blatt ab unb toarf e§ in perceived, picked a (tree-)leaf off and threw it into bag SBaf-fer. 2)ie 33ie-ne er-griff e§ ititb ret-te-te fief». the water. The bee seized it and saved herself. 9Zid)t tan-ge nadj-fjer fafc bie 5£aub-e anf ei-nern Not long afterwards sat the dove on a Sannt nnb be-nterf--te nidjt, ba£ ein 3cUger ntit fei-ner tree and perceived not, that a hunter with his $lin-te anf fie jieHe. 2)ie banf-ba-re 23ie-ne, tnet-^e gun at her aimed. The thankful bee, which bie ©e--fafyr er-famt-te, in melier if)-re $}oI)M!)ä-te-rin the danger recognised, in which her benefactress ftcfj be-fanb, flog Ijin-ju' unb ftacf) ben 3jä-ger in bie herself found, flew near and stung the hunter in the Öanb. $er rei greun-be £jnt ber 9)lenfd) in bie-fer 2Mt; Three friends has man in ^his world; wie be-tra-gen fie fief; in ber Stun-be be§ $o-be§, how behave they in the hour of death, toenn ©ott ifjtt nor fein ©e-ridjt for-bert? — when God him before his tribunal summons? — The ©elb fein er-fter fyrcuttb , uer-tafjt ifjn juerft unb money, his first friend, leaves him first and gef)t niefjt mit tljm. ©et-ne 23er-manb-ten unb goes not with him. His relations and f^reun-be be-gtei-ten if)n bi§ ju ber Stf)ii-re be§ friends accompany him un to the door of the ©ra-be3, unb feieren bann ju-rüd in U)-re §äu--fer. grave, and return then back to their houses. 2>er $rit-te, ben er im Se-ben am öf-te-ften öer-gafj, The third, whom he in life the oftenest forgot, finb fei-ne gu-ten 3Ber-fe. Sie al-Iein be-glei-ten are his good works. They alone accompany ifjtt bi§ ju bem Stljro-ne be§ 9Jidj-ter§; fie ge-£)ett him as far as the throne of the judge; they pre- uor-cm, fpre-djen für ifjn, unb ftn-ben Sarm-ljer-jig-feit ■cede, speak for him, and find mercy unb ®na-be. und grace. Etymology. Preliminary notions. Parts of speech. There are in the German language ten parts of speech: 1) The article, ber ^Crtifel or bag ®efd)Ied)tgtt)ort. 2) The noun or substantive, bag ^auptlüort. 3) The determinative adjective, bag SBefttmmuuggtoort. 4) The (qualifying) adjective, bag (Sigenfdjaftgttmrt. 5) The pronoun, bag gürtüort. 6) The verb, bag 3 e ütocn*t. Etymology. 17 7) The adverb, bag ttmftanbgtoort. 8) The preposition, bag ÜBortoorf. 9) The conjunction, bag 33inbetoort. 10) The interjection, bag 5Iugruftoort. The first six are variable, the four last invariable. The change which the first five undergo by means of terminations, is called declension; it refers to gender, number and case. There are in German three genders : the masculine (bag männliche), the feminine (bag toeibltdje) and the neuter gender (bag ($efcf)Iedjt). The rules concerning the gender will be found in the 10 th lesson. There are also two numbers: Singular (©itt-jafjl) and Plural and four cases, expressing the different relations of words to each other, namely : the nominative, genitive, dative and accusative. The nominative case (2öerfctfl) or the subject answers to the question: who? or what? Ex.: Who is learning? The boy (Latin: puer). The genitive or possessive case (2BeffenfafI) answers to the question: ivhose? or of which? Ex.: Whose book? The boy’s book (pueri). The dative (2BemfaH) answers to the question to whom? Ex.: To whom shall I give it? To the boy (puero). The accusative or objective case (233enfaII) marks the object of an action and answers to the question : whom? or what? Ex.: Whom or what do you see? I see the boy (puer urn), the house (domum). Note. For the vocative case there is no particular form in German ; if required, the nominative serves for it. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 2 18 First Lesson. ((grfte fieftion.) On the definite Article. (®er beftimmte 3lrtifel.) There are two articles in German as in English: the definite and the indefinite. The definite article , answering to the English the., is used to indicate the gender of substantives, and has for each gender in the singular a particular form, viz. : masc. foe?, fern, foie, neat foilö, as: Xtx Sftcmn the man. $ic $rau the woman. $inb the child. The plural for all three genders is foie, as: $ic Knaben the hoys. It is varied by four cases: the nominative , genitive , dative and accusative. It will be observed that the accu- sative singular of the feminine and neuter gender, and the accusative plural are always like the nominative. Declension of the definite article, Singular. masc. fern, neuter. Nom. focr foie fofl$ the Gen. focS foe? foe8 of the Bat. bent foer foetn to the Acc. foen foie foa8 the Plural, for all genders. foie the focr of the focn to the foie the In tne same manner, me dined, which are often substituted for the defimte ar- tide, viz. the same manner, the following words are de- masc. iefer euer fro e I cf) e r ^eber Singular. fem. biefe jene toeldje jcbe neuter. bicfc§ this, jene§ that tt)elcf)e§ which? Jebe§ every that. Plural. for all genders. biefe these Jene those tueldje which 1 Definite Article. 19 Declension. Singular. masc. fern. neuter. N. biefer btefe biefeg this (that) G. biejeg biefer biefeg of this D. biefeut biefer biefeut to this A. biefett biefe biefeg this. Examples. Plural. for all genders. biefe these biefer of these bicfett to these biefe these. liefer Tftann this man. Sene grau that woman, geber 9ttann every man. ®iefe grau, this woman. 2® eleven ©tod (Acc.) which stick? gebe§ Hinb every child. Words (äßörter).*) $er Honig the king, ber 23ater the father, ber Tftann the man, husband, ber ©oljn the son. ber ©arten the garden, ber 2© ein the wine, ber ©tod the stick, ber §unb the dog, hound, ber Setter the plate. $te Königin the queen. unb and. ga yes. S. gef) f)abe I have bu tjaft thou hast er t)at he has fie Ijat she has e§ Ijat it has bie Gutter the mother, bie grau the woman, wife, bie Softer the daughter, bie geber the pen, feather, bie Hatje the cat. ©djtofj the castle, palace, bag Hinb the child bag §aug the house, bag Sudj the hook, bag Laffer the water. 9ton no. nid)t not. §a'6e idt) have I? I) aft bu hast thou? tjat cr has he? t)at fie has she? f)at eg has it? Reading Exercise (Uebung). 1. £)er 25ater unb ber ©oljn. S)ie Gutter unb bag Hinb. 2)er ©arten unb bag §aug. gener ©arten., jeneg Jpaug. gd) fyabe ben ©tod.**) S)u f)aft bag SBaffer. S)er Honig I)at bag ©djlofj. S)er 2Sater tjat ben 2®ein. 2Beldjcu 233ein fjat er? 2Betd)eg *) In this and the following lists of words the article precedes each substantive, that it may be learnt at the same time. It may also be observed here, once for all, that these words preceding the Exercises, are to be well committed to memory, as their signification is seldom repeated when appearing in subsequent Exercises. **) The noun governed by the verb tjaben (to have), and by all transitive verbs must be in the Accusative. — All German monosyllabic substantives of whatever gender are alike in the Accusative and Nominative. 2 * 20 Lesson 1. Staffer? liefer §unb. $)iefe $a|e. 2)a§ ®inb biefer (Gen.) grau. SOßetdOe^ $inb? gebe§ $inb. Söeldje grau? SBeldjer Tftann bat ben §unb? SBeldjen ©tod bat ber &ann? (Sr bat biefen ©tod. <&Utfga0e. 2. Exercise for translation. 1. The king and the queen. The son and the daughter. The father and the mother. The child has the book. The daughter , has the book. The man has the (Acc. ben) stick. I have the wine. The man has the water. This father. This woman. This house. The king has the castle. The queen has the book. Which book? Which house? Which pen? This book; that pen. Every man. I have the (Acc.) dog. 2. *) I have not the stick. The child has the stick. That wine and this water. This man has not the book. Which castle has the (Nom.) king ? He has that castle. That mother has the child. The woman has the house. The castle of the queen. f) Has the man the book? Which plate? This plate. The son of the queen. The daughter has the pen. Every mother. Every book. Conversation ((Sprechübung). §abe ich bie gebet? ga, bu baft bte gebet, fmft bu ba§ Sudb? 9?ein, id; babe ba§ 33ud) nidjt. §at ber 25ater ben ÜEßein? (Sr bat ben SBein. §at bie gran bie $aje? ga, fie bat bie $a|e. SBetdje $ajje bat fie? ©ie bat bie junge (young) ^aje. §at ba§ $inb ben ©tod? 9?ein, ber $ater bat ben ©tod. •2BeId)e§ ©d)'toj 3 bat bie Königin? ©ie bat biefe§ ©cblofj. §at biefe grau bag $inb? D^ein, jene grau bat e§ (it). ( §at ber 9flann ben §unb? £)er Tftann bat ben §unb niebt; er bat bie $a£e. £0eKie $a|e ift ein Xf)ier. £)ie jftofe ift eine Slumc. ©eben Sie mir biefe§ Sud), ©eben Sie mir and) eine Slume. ®iefe§ §au§ ift nid)t fd)ön. Unfere Stabt ift feljr alt. 4. 1. I have a rose. S lie has a book. You have a 2 ) stick. My brother has a pear. My sister has an apple. His child has a knife. We have no bread. Give me a rose. The father has no horse. A dog is an animal. Which pen has the child ? The son has a hat. Who has a flower? My daughter has a flower. Where is your mother? That child has no apple. I have no (Acc. m.) spoon. That house is old. 3 ) Her house is beautiful. My horse is young. Have you seen 1 ) the castle? 2. Give (©eben @ie) this stick to 4 ) my brother. Give this penknife to 4 ) your sister. The apple is a fruit. The 1) In compound tenses the participle past comes last. 2) ’ Accusative masc. (see the foot-note ** p. 19). 3) Adjectives, when placed after their noun, remain unchanged. 4) The word ‘to’ indicating the dative, must not be translated. Declension. 23 rose is no fruit, the rose is a flower. You have no hat. Where is your hat? Who has 3 seen lmy 2 hat? Give me a knife. Give me also a fork and a spoon. He has not his coat. They have no horse. Where is my brother? Where is the rose of my (Gen. f.) sister? Not every horse is fine; this horse is young. Conversation. 3Ba§ fyabett 0ie? §abett 6ie eine fRofe ? fmbert fe? :3Mdje§ Keffer bat mein $inb? gft bie Dtofe eine grud)t? SLÖefd^en @tod haben 6ie? UBer T^at mein 23udj? §aben 6ie SBaffer? gft bie $atje ein Xf)ier ? §at gbre Gutter einen Gruber? gdj babe eine 23tume. ga, id) babe eine D^ofe. Dfcin, id) l)obe fein ^ßferb , id) babe einen §unb. $inb bat fein 93rob. ^eine ©djmefter bat bein $3ud). @ie (it) ift nidjt ba (there), gcb babe biefe§ §au§. (£r ift febr jung/ gbr Gruber bat e§ (it). 9fein, fie bat feine 9tofe>. (£§ bat fein SDfceffer. 9Mn, bie Dfofe ift eine 93Iume. g(b babe meinen @tod £)a§ $inb bat gbr 33ud). Söir haben fein SBaffer; aber (but) mir haben Söein. ga, bie $at)e ift ein Shier. Steine stutter bat feinen 33rnber, aber fie bat eine ©djmefter Third Lesson. (®ritte Seftion.) Declension of Substantives. (Sefflnation ber ^aubttoörter.) The German grammarians are not yet agreed on the division of the nouns substantive into declensions, and on the number of these. Some adopt 6, others 5, others again 4 or 3, and even 2 declensions only. This distribution, however, is quite arbitrary; indeed, in this matter there is much irregularity in German. The reason is, that the language was practised and cultivated by different tribes in various ways before a grammar existed. So they where obliged to accept matters as they were \ and to make the best of them. Notwithstanding, there 24 Lesson 3. are three fundamental ideas, on which declension is principally founded, viz. the gender, the termination , and the number of syllables, and though this system pre- sents occasionally also some deviations and exceptions, it offers really far less difficulty than any other distri- bution.*) We consider therefore that each of the three genders has its own mode of inflexion, and further that the mas- culine gender admits of three different forms of declension, the feminine of one, and the neuter also of one. Hence we adopt five declensions, the three first of which comprise the masculine, the fourth the feminine, the fifth the neuter nouns, a few exceptions not included. Our distribution has the great advantage of enabling the learner, on seeing any substantive, accompanied by its article, to refer it to its proper declension. This is not to be attained by any other system. In consequence we state as follows : 1) The first declension comprehends all masculine and neuter nouns ending in el, en, er, djen and I ein. 2) The second comprehends all masculine nouns end- ing in e, and most foreign masculine substantives having the accent on the last syllable. 3) The third contains all monosyllabic masculine nouns and those of two syllabes ending in id), i g and ling, and a few words of foreign origin. 4) To the fourth belong all the feminine substantives. 5) To the fifth all neuter substantives not ending in el, en, er, djen and lein (see 1). Table of the endings of the five declensions. Singular. masculine. feminine. neuter . I. N. — - G. --8 D. — - A. — - II. III. — e — — en — eg (g) — en -(e) — en — IV. k\ no > change at all V. -(-) — eg (8) -(e) *) Most German grammarians adopt only two declensions, the so-called strong declension and the weak one, the former comprising all nouns having in the genitive case §, the latter those having -vT /« iriur «J ^ w. e 4 I l c — nt » e » e — tt or ett — e — ett " e » e — tt or ett — e — cu _^_ett _^_ett — tt or ett ^ett — ett .» e JL-t — tt or ett — e j V v B v/e/ R e ni arks. * Before we present the declensions themselves, we think it well to give the following general hints, which may faci- litate their study. 1) The genitive case in the singular of all masculine nouns (except those of the 2nd decl.) and of all neuter nouns without any exception ends in $* * **) ) (or c8). 2) The accusative singular of feminine and neuter words is always like the nominative. 3) The accusative singular of the masculine nouns not ending in e is also like the nominative case. 4) The vocative case, in either number, is always under- stood to be like the nominative without the article; it will therefore be mentioned only once. 5) In the plural the nominative, genitive and accusative are always alike. 6) The dative plural of all declinable words terminates with n. 7) All root-nouns ending in e form their plural m ett, without modifying their vowel. 8) All feminine substantives remain unchanged in the singular. 9) Most monosyllables having a, 0, U or nu in their root, modify in the plural this vowel into ü, Ö, Ü or citt. 10) In all compound nouns only the last component is declined according to the declension it belongs to. First declension. To the first declension belong all masculine and neuter nouns ending in e(, ett and et, besides all diminutives in djeit and (ein, which are of the neuter gender. in the genitive and all other cases ett. Despite the great diffe- rence in the plurals, this arrangement may suffice for Germans, who know from habit the inflexion of each word; but it is in- sufficient for foreigners, as it does not enable them to ascertain the inflexion of the other cases. *) These marks indicate the modified vowel. **) In a simple §, when polysyllabic, in CÖ when monosyllabic. 26 Lesson 3. The only change of termination which substantives belonging to this declension undergo, consists in taking § for the genitive singular, and n for the dative plural This termination n however is common to all declensions in the dative plural. W>rds terminating with n d© n#t require an additional n. Most words belonging to the 1st declension, modify in the plural the three vowels a, $, U into t, i, ii. 1) Examples of Singular. N. ber 53rnber the brother G. be§ S3ruber=8 of the brother D. bem 33ruber to the brother A. ben 33ruber the brother Voc. $ S3ruber! © brother! masculine nouns. Plural. bie früher the brothers ber. Sörüber of the brothers ben 23riiber=n to the brothers bie S3riiber the brothers f> trüber! « brothers! N. ber ©arten the garden G. be§ ©artend of the garden D. bem ©arten to the garden A. ben ©arten the garden. bie ©arten the gardens ber ©örten of the gardens ben ©nr ten to the gardens bie ©arten the gardens. In the same manner are declined: S)er Slater the father, ber 91f)fel the apple, ber (Sdjhiffel the key. ber §Utgel the wing, ber Söffet the spoon, ber ©ngel the angel, ber §immel (the) heaven, ber Sefjrer the teacher, ber (Schüler the pupil, ber (Stieget the looking-glass, ber Stegen the rain, ber (Stiefel the boot. Plur. bie Leiter, bie Stef) ber Setter the plate. ber §ammer the hammer. ber Soget the bird. ber (Sctjneiber the tailor. ber (Sdjmager the brother-in-law. ber Gcngtdnber the Englishman. ber Stömer the Roman. * ber Stbter*) the eagle. *ber Srof)fen the drop. *ber $nd)en the cake. *ber -Dialer the painter. *ber Stmerifaner the American, bie @d)üler, bie SSögel :c. 2) Examples of Singular. N. ba§ Qenfter the window G. be§ $enfter§ of the window -D. bem $enfter to the window A. ba§ 5 en P er the window. neuter nouns. Plural. bie ^enffer $Je. windows ber genfter of the windows ben genftern to the windows bie Senfier the windows. *) Those marked with * do not modify their vowel in the plural, as: the eagles, bie Slbler; bie $ucfyen, bie Staler ic. 'C 1st declension. 27 Singular. > 1. bag 93aumcf)en the little tree \G. beg $äumcf)eng of the little tr. -Z). bem 93äumd)en to the little tr. A. bag Säumten the little tree. Such are : bag gcuer the fire, bag SJteffer the knife, bag SBetter the weather. *bag SBaffer the water, bag' (Silber (the) silver. Plural. bte 53äumdjen the little trees ber 53äumdjen of the little trees ben 33ctumd)en to the little trees bte 53äumd)en the little trees. ba§ Tupfer (the) copper, bag 0ofter the convent, bag Mittel the naeans. bag ^eifdjen the violet, bag 9JMb$en the girl, maiden. V 3) Declension with tfe indediriite article. V b masc. neuter. N. ein Wiener a man-servant mein Qimmer my room G. eineg ©ienerg of a servant meineg gimmerg* of my room D. einem Wiener to/a servant meinem dimmer to my room A. einen Wiener a servant. ntein dimmer my room. Compound nouns of tl/e 1st declension (see p. 25, § 10): £)er $rof3'üater\ the grandfather. Gen. beg ®roj$tmterg tc. bag geber'meffer the penknife. Gen. beg gebermefjerg. ber (S^nc^'ieljrer the master of languages, ber §augfd)luffel the house-key. ber 3Hg'üoge( the bird of passage. PI. bie 3 u 0öögel. (Sd^ofgimmer the bed-room. @b$erva,ti®ii's. words originally terminating in eit, & belong also t0 the first de- fe^g^uj^l|Jey|_dg) not change their vowel. geTjRamem or 5tame the name, betrieben or griebe the peace uU Glauben or ©laubedhe faith, ber 2Biffen or SBihe the will. j^eagu^^pi: ; gunfe the spark; ber geffen or gefg the rock. the ber ©amen or Same the seed. )er Oiebanfen or <$ebanfe the ber 58nrf;ftabe or <8ud)ftaben the thought. letter of the alphabet. Singular. 1 . ber tarnen or Dxante the name r. beg Dcameitg of the name \ bem tarnen to the name ben tarnen the name. Declension. Plural. bie tarnen the names, ber tarnen of the names ben 97a men to the names bie tarnen the names. 2) The following words are declined in the singular according to this declension, but admit of an irregularity in tnc- plural by taking it. See the 9th lesson. Lesson 3. ¥//?7 "smsmm auer the peasant. ber Pantoffel the slipper, bet Setter the Bavarian. bet ©eöatter the god-father, bet Setter the cousin. ber 9ttu§fel the muscle, ber 9?ad)bar the neighbour. ber ^ßrofeffor the professor, ber ©tad)el the sting. ber Softer the doctor. Gen. be§ Sauer§, be§ Setter§, be§ * *Rad)bar§, be§ 2)of'tor§. Blur. bte Sauer«; bie Setter«, bte Sagbar«, bie ©ofto're«. Words. ©ott God. ber ©uropäer the European, ber ©panier the Spaniard, ber ©anger the singer, ber ©djöpfer the creator. ba§ ©olb (the) gold, bie 20ot)t'tt)at the benefit, franf ill. gut good. * ftein little, small, fepr very, grofs large, great, tall. Ytnb are. ^tuei two. in in. t)ier here. Reading Exercise. 5. £)er Sruber be§ Sater§. &er ©arten be§ Sruber§. 2)a§ Säumten be§ ©arten§. 3n (in with the dative) bent ©arten. $n bem Simmer. $n ben Simmer«. £>ie genfter (pi.) be§ 3im= mer§. $>er Wiener be§ 9Imerifaner§. ®ie tropfen be§ Segen§. ©eben ©ie biefe tpfet ben ©Gütern. £)em Setter. Stein ©djmager. $eine Sruber. £)eine ©d)Iüffel (pi). %d) $a&c ben ©djluffet be§ Simmers, ©r pat ba§ Steffer feineS SruberS. $)ie %blerjinb Söget. $>ie äpfel finb auf (on)^bem Setter. $)a§ Stäb^p ift in einem Softer. 2ßo ift ber ©djneiber? ©r ift nid)t bier: Jlufgaße. 6. 1. The garden of the father. The gardens of my brother. I have two spoons. The Englishman has two servants. We are in the room (Bat.). My father is in the garden. Our teacher is old. The man has two hammers. Is your brother-in-law ia doctor? These cakes are not good. Where are the birds? They are in the garden. Give me your (Acc.) plate. A bird has two wings. The wings of the birds. The angels of (the)*) heaven. Have you seenf) the rooms of the American? 2. The castle has [a]*) hundred (fjunbert) windows. The book of the pupil. The plate of the girl. We are Americans. You are Europeans. The violets are in the gardens. The pupils are at school (in ber ©d)ule). The rooms of my fatlieit I have no silver and no gold. Give me the key of my roonu The name of the painter. The benefit of (the) peace. Tho f) See the foot-note 1) p. 22. *) Observe that a parenthesis (.. .) encloses a word to be trans- lated or an annotation, whereas brackets [...] signify » leave oiit «. 2nd declension. 29 house of my teacher. We have no fire. God is the creator of (the) heaven and (of the) earth (unb ber ©rbe). Conversation. ©ein Dfame ift ©d)mibt. 2Setd)eS (what) ift ber 9?ame biefeS ©ngtcinberS? §aben ©ie bie 93öget gefeiert? Sft baS (that) ©arten? 2öo finb bie ©dfliiffel meines gimmerS ? 20er (who) ift biefeS 93täbd)en? 2öer ift biefer junge SJtonn? ©inb ©ie ein 9DMer? Sft er ein ©uropäer? 2öer ift in bem ©arten? §abe id) baS 53ud) S§te§ SSaterS ? §aben ©ie ben ©tocf meines SSruberS ? §aben ©ie baS §auS bcS ©pa= nierS gefehlt? 2öer ift trän!? Sft ber ©Riegel fleht? ^a, id) pabe fie (them) gefepen. ©S ift ber ©arten jneineS 9fad)barS. §ier finb fie. ©ie ift bie Shcpter eines ©ng= länberS. ©r ift ber ©opn meines Retters. 9?ein, itp bin (I am) fein 9Jtater; id) bin ein ©änger. Sa, er ift ein ©panier. $)ie Stouter meines ScprerS. Sa, ©ie paben eS (it). 9tein, id) pabe ipn (it) nid)t. 9tein, id) pabe fein §auS nid)t gefepen. 3)er Wiener beS 9ttaIerS ift tränt. 9?eht, er (it) ift groj$ unb fd)ön. fourth Lesson. (SSierte 2eftton.) i Second declension. This declension contains another series of masculine words, viz. : 1) all those ending in e. Its inflexion is very simple. All the cases, both of the singular and plural, are formed by adding n, without altering the vowel in the plural: Example. Singular. IJV. ber $nabe the boy (G. beS Änabcn of the boy \D. bem Knaben to the boy A. ben Knaben the boy. Thus are declined: S£)er 9tffe the monkey, ber Odjfe (DcpS) the ox. Plural. bie Knaben the boys ber Knaben of the boys ben Knaben to the boys bie Knaben the boys. ber Some the lion, i ber Qhlfe the falcon. Lesson 4. 30 ber üßote the messenger, ber ©rfie the heir, ber Dfeffe the nephew, ber Jliefe the giant, ber ©flaue the slave, ber 3'ube the Jew. ber ^ßatfje the godfather, ber Jpirte (§irt) the herdsman, ber Jpeibe the heathen. ber §afe the hare, ber Sfafie the raven, ber ©atte the husband, ber 33ebiente the man-servant, ber $ran$ofe the Frenchman, ber ©ad)fe the Saxon, ber 9tujje the Russian, ber *ßreu£;e the Prussian, ber Stiirfe the Turk. (See the 12th lesson, § 9.) Plur. bie Effert, bie Odjjen, bie Sötuen, bie Mafien zc. Note. Further all adjectives used substantively when preceded by the definite article: 2)er 3llte the old man. ber $ranfe the patient (sick man), ber IRetfettbe the traveller. ber ©elef)rte the learned man. Gm. : be§ 5llten-, be§ Traufen, be§ IReifertben zc. 2) The following words, though monosyllabic, are also subject to this mode, of inflexion, doubtless because in. course of time they have dropped a letter. Example. Singular. N. ber ©raf x ) the count, earl G. be§ ©rafen of the count D. bem ©rafen to the count A. ben (Grafen the count. Thus : Singular. 2) er §elb 2 ) the hero. Plural. bie ©rdfen the counts ber ©rafen, of the counts ben ©rafen to the counts bie ©raff^JJjhe counts. Plural. ber giirft 3 ) the prince. bcr§e«) the “ aster ’ ^ j gentleman, ber 9Zarr \ ,, » , ber St^or / the f ° o1 ' ber ^8ar the bear. Gen. be§ gelben ic. bie gelben :c. = be§ dürften ic. bie dürften zc. | * be§ §errn zc. bie §erren zc. = / be§ barren zc. bie barren zc. = \ be§ £f)oren :c. bie Xljoren zc. = be§ 33ären zc. bie $8ären zc. = be§ Tftenfcfyen. bie Tftenfdjen zc. ber Tftenfd) man, mankind. 3) All masculine nouns from other languages, not ending in at, ait, aft or ?, 4 ) and having the accent on the last syllable, are declined according to this mode of inflexion: 1) Old German: ber ©rabe. 2) Anglo-saxon: haeleth (dissyllabic). 3) ber Sifrft is like the English root first = ber Gsrfte. 4) Such as ber ©eneraP Offisier zc. r which belong to the 3rd declension; see p. 35, 4. 2nd declension. 31 Example. Singular. N. ber Btubent' the student G. be§ Btuben'ten of the student D. betn Btubenten to the student A. ben Btubenten the student. Plural. bie Btuben'ten the students ber Btubenten of the students ben Btubenten to the students bie Btubenten the students. Such are: SDer Slböofat' the lawyer, ber ^atnerab' the comrade, ber Gianbibat' the candidate, ber SPbUofopy the philosopher, ber ®ufat' the ducat, ber Bolbat' the soldier, ber Tftonard)' the monarch, ber hornet' the comet, ber Sßtanet' the planet. Flur, bie ^Iböofaten, bie ber ^ßräfibent' the president, ber Sttyrann' the tyrant, ber ^cfuif the Jesuit, ber Regent' the regent, ber (SJepfjanf the elephant, ber Diamant' the diamond, ber Sßoet' the poet, ber (Shrift the Christian, ber ^ßrinft the prince. Botbaten, bie Triften :c. Words. 2) er $aifer the emperor, bie ipeerbe the herd, flock, bie 2hnte the aunt, ber Körper the body, ber ©rieche the Greek. S. $d) bin I am- bu bift thou art er iff he is fie iff she is PI. tt)ir finb we are Bie finb 1 you are (it)r feib) / ye are fie finb they are ber 33ricf the letter, ber (£fet (1st decl.) the ass. fennen (Bie? do you know? icf) gebe I give, toar was; fjatte had. 33in id) am I? bift bu art thou ? iff er is he? iff fie is she? finb ttnr are we? finb Bie \ 0 (feib t*t) / are y° u? finb fie are they? Reading Exercise. 7. 2)a§ Tfteffer be§ Knaben. $dj Qcbe bem Knaben 53rob. kennen Bie ben Knaben? 2)a§ 93ud) cine§ Bfubenten. £)er Korber cine§ (SJepfjanten. £)ie $tügel ber 51bler unb ber galten. ®ie Boibaten be§ $aifer§. S)ie Ütaben finb 23öget. ®ie Knaben tjaben jtnei Jtaben unb brei §afen. $Die dürfen fjaben Bftaüen. 4) ic $ofaden be§ $aifer§ finb Jtuffen £)a§ ©otb be§ (Grafen. £>er 53rief be§ giirfien. ®ie 9Jtenfd)en finb fterbtid) (mortal). 5) er Gruber be§ ^rinjen Albert. «Aufgabe. 8. 1. The brothers of the boy. These boys are brothers. The name of the student. The sister of the count. The aunt 32 Lesson 5. of the prince. The knife of the soldier. The letter of the president. The emperors Calipula and Nero were (ftaren) tyrants. Do you know the princes ? The child has a raven. The Americans have a president. I have seen the diamonds of the prince. The old (alten) Greeks had (fatten) slaves. Give the gold to*) the Jew. 2. We have seen a comet. Are you Saxons or Prussians? The body of a giant is very large. These two boys are my nephews. Those soldiers are Russians. The Turks are no heathens. We are Christians. These boys are Jews. My comrades are ill. We have no oxen, we have two asses. Give this ( Acc .) letter to*) the messenger {Dat.) of the count. Conversation. §aben ©ie ben ©kremten ge= fetjen? §aben bie Knaben ben Soften, ben Stiger unb ben 23aren ge= fefjen? Söer ift biefer SOtann? $ft biefer ©tubent ein $reuf$e? 2ßer ift fein 23ater? Sieben ©ie (do you like) bie Hffen? kennen ©ie biefe ©olbaten? §aben ©ie einen §afen? Stft ber Gebiente be§ (grafen . ein granjofe? §aben ©ie einen Neffen? ©inb biefe Knaben $uben? 2öo finb $f>re $ameraben? tpaben bie fatten gtiigel? 2Bar ber §elb ein Jtuffe? SBir tjaben if>n (it) ^eute (to-day) gefe^en. Unfere Knaben f)aben ben Soften nnb ben 9Sären gefe^en ; aber (hut) nidft ben 3Tiger. (£r ift ber Gruber be§ Sßräfiben'ten. •ftein, er ift ein ©ad)fe. ©ein $ater ift ein $tbt)ofat'. Dlein, id) liebe bie Riffen nid^t. $d) fenfte fie (know them) nid)t. $a, id) f)abe brei §afen. 91ein, er ift ein ©nglänber. Sd) t)abe gftet- Reffen. ' Dtan, fie finb (Swiften. ©ie finb nid)t t)ier (here), fie finb ju Jpaufe (at home). $a, alle (all the) $ogel l)aben glitgel. 91ein, er ftar ein ©riedje. Fifth Lesson. (fünfte Seftion.) Third declension. This declension contains the greatest number of the masculine substantives. In the Singular , the Genitive is formed by adding c§ or § to the nominative; in the da- *) to is not be translated. 3rd declension. 33 tive, the word remains either unchanged or takes an e; the accusative is like the nominative. All the Plural cases take e , and the dative an it, besides the e. More- over, most of them having a, 0, It or au in the root, modify it into Ä, Ö, Ü or äu. To this declension belong 1) all masculine monosyllabic roots. Examoles. Singular. N. ber Sifd) the fish G. be§ $ifd)e§ of the fish D. bem $ifd)(e) to the fish A. ben gifd) the fish. Plural. bie 5 i f cf) e the fishes ber $ifd)e of the fishes ben ^ifcfjen to the fishes bie §ifd)e the fishes. N. ber ©ol)n the son G. be§ ©ol)n(e)§ of the son D. bem ©ol)n(e) to the son A. ben ©ol)n the son. bie ©ö.l)ne the sons ber ©öijne of the sons ben ©öl) nett to the sons bie ©öl)ne the sons. N. ber 33aum the tree G. be§ 53aum(e)§ of the tree JD. bem 33aum(e) to the tree A. ben 33aum the tree. bie '53 ä um e the trees ber 53aume of the trees ben Räumen to the trees bie Q3äume the trees. Note. Concerning the inflexion of the genitive and dative sin- gular, e§ and e, we may remark that the c is only euphonical and in common conversation often omitted, especially in the dative. We may say be§ ©ol)n§ for be§ ©ol)ne§; bem ©o^n for bem 8ol)ne; one sounds as well as the other; but we never say be§ be§ $fab§ or be§ i)31a^§, this being intolerably harsh. Such are: ber Stifd) the table, ber ©tuf)l the chair, ber §ut the hat. ber ©turm the storm, ber Sting the ring, ber greunb the friend, ber §einb the enemy, foe. ber Sift the branch, ber ©aft the guest, ber $uf; the foot, ber ^luj) the river, ber $ud)§ the fox. ber SBolf the wolf. ber 3af)n the tooth, ber Qafyn the cock, ber ©turm the storm, ber ütl)urm the tower, ber 5£raum the dream, ber 2Bafl the rampart, ber $o:pf the head, ber S£on the sound, ber Sofjn the reward, ber Stocf the coat, ber ©tact the stick, ber $anj the dance, ber S3rief the letter &c. Plur. bie %ifd)e, bie ©tiif)Ie, bie 3^nc r bie greunbe, bie gliiffe, bie ©tötfe, bie Briefe ic. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. g 34 Lesson 5. Note. The following nouns do not modify their vowel in the Plural: 2) er 9lrm the arm. ber 3Lag the day. ber £)unb the dog, hound, ber ad)§ the badger. Plur. bie 9lrme, bie £age, ber 2adj§ the salmon, ber 5lal the eel. ber §uf the hoof, ber $fab the path, ber (Stoff the stuff, ber ^ßunft the point, bie §unbe, bie (Sdptfye ic. 2) When such masculine roots have a prefix before them, they are declined in the same manner as if they were simple; but it must be observed that, being no longer monosyllabic, the euphonical t in the genitive and dative singular is generally omitted. This is also the case with compound words of this declension. Example s. Singular. N. ber 23e=fel)f the order G. be§ ^8efe!)te of the order D. bem 33efet)I to the order A. ben $8efef)I the order. Plural. N. bie 93efef)Ie the orders G. ber 33efef)le of the orders D. ben 53efef)len to the orders A. bie 33cfel)Ie the orders. Singular. ber 2fyfel-baum the apple-tree be§ 91pfribaum§ of the apple-tree bem ^tyfelbaum to the apple-tree ben Apfelbaum the apple-tree. ‘ Plural. bie Apfelbäume the apple-trees ber ApfelMume .of the apple-trees ben Apfelbäumen to the apple-tr. bie Apfelbäume the apple-trees. Such are: £)er ©efang the song, ber ©ebraud) custom, use. ber $orl)ang the curtain, ber Unfall the accident, ber Au§gang the issue. ber Ohrring the ear-ring, ber §wnbfd)ui) the glove, ber (§>troPut the straw-hat. ber Ucberrod the great-coat, ber Feiertag the holiday. Gen. be§ ©efang§, be§ $orI)ang§, be§ Au#gmtg§ zc. Plur. bie 2$orf)änge, bie ©ebräud)e, bie Jpanbfdpilje zc. 3) This third declension comprehends further the masculine derivatives ending in ig, id), at and ling, as: Singular. Plural. N. ber $önig the king G. be§ $önig$ of the king D. bem ®önig to the king A. ben $önig the king. bic Könige the kings ber Könige of the kings ben Königen to the kings bie Könige the kings. 3rd declension. 35 Such are: ber $äfig the cage. ber $firfid) the peach, ber Jitejppid) the carpet. ber ifto'nat the month, ber ©ffig the vinegar. ber Jüngling the youth, ber §onig (the) honey. ber faring the herring. Plur. bie Käfige, bie donate, bie Jünglinge :c. 4) Further some nouns tt(, ait, at, ttft and ter, as: Singular. N. ber ^ßalaff the palace G. be§ $ala[te§ of the palace D. bem $alaft to the palace A. ben ^ßalaft the palace. Such are: of foreign origin ending in Plural. bie ^alafte the palaces ber $dafte of the palaces ben ^ßaläften to the palaces bie ^ßaläfte the palaces. ber ©eneral' the general, ber ^arbinaf the cardinal, ber ^tbmiraf the admiral. *ber Sßofaf the vowel. Plur. bie ©enera'Ie, bie ber Kaplan' the chaplain, ber Tftoraft' the swamp, ber 2Utar' the altar, ber Officer the officer, e, bie Offi^ie're :c. Words. 2)er SBalb the forest, wood. bie 9?af)rung the food, ber Scfjlaf sleep. ber ©lord) the stork, ber £ob death. . ber Winter winter, ber §rofcfy the frog. meiß white. lang long, brei three, hier four, mit (dot.) with, aber but. Reading Exercise. 9. ®ie ©öfjne be§ $ater§. ®ie gifdje be§ 5tuf (on) bem £ifd)(e). 91uf ben Räumen. ®ie 33aume be§ 2Balbe§. ®ie SSögcI finb in bem 2BaIb(e). ®ie 3cU)ne be§ Sömen. 9ttit bem ©tod(e). TO ben gitßcn. $)icfe ©tiifjle finb alt. 3'd) tyatte einen Sraum. ®ie ©olbatcn finb auf ben Spälten. $)ic güße ber §afjne ßaben Spornen (spurs). 2)ie Sßaläfte ber Könige finb groß. 2Bir tjaben bie £eppid)e be§ $önig§ gefetjen. §aben Sie bie SOßölfe unb güdjfe nidjt gefetjen? ®ie grcunbe meine§ $ater§ finb pier, ©ie §unbe beinc§ $etter§. £)er Sdjlaf ift ba§ 33ilb (image) be§ &obe§. §ier finb $ßre Sdpupe. SBo finb meine §anbfdjupe? Aufgabe. 10. 1. The tables and the chairs of the room. The trees of the wood. The ramparts of the enemies. The rings of the girl. The letters of my friends. With the son (Pat.) of my brother. With the sons of the count. Do you know my guests? The fishes are in the rivers. We have a table but 3 * 36 Lesson 6. no chairs. I give the dogs to the sons of the Englishman. The days are long. The trees have branches. I have no stick. We have no sticks. The curtains of my room are white. The frogs are the food of (the) storks. 2. The storms of (the) winter are over (boriiber). On the (auf bem) chair of the president. The gloves are on the table. The fish(es) have no feet. The frogs have no teeth. The birds are on the trees. My sons have seen two ravens and four storks. Three months and two days. The banks (Die XXfer) of the rivers. The name of the officer. The herrings are fishes. Do you know those two generals? Yes, I know them (id) fenne fie). The windows of the palace. In the pa- lace of the king. Conversation. 2Bo finb bie gifd)e? 2ßo finb meine brei Söf)ne? 2Md)e ütöcfe l)at ber Sd)neiber? Sinb biefe Stüfite alt? 93on mem fpredjen Sie? (Of whom do you speak?) 2öie biete (how many) Tftonate? Sßie biete Stage? ^ Sprechen Sie nicfyt bon (of) bem Sot)ne be§ 2et)rer§? 2Bie biete Stt)ürme t)at bie Stabt? 2BeId)en Stod l)aben Sie? £mben ©ie feine greunbe? 2Bie biete güfje T^at ein §nnb? 2öa§ f)aben ©ie gefeiert? SSaben bie Schüler einen geier= tag? 2Bo ift ber ©eneral ? (Sie finb in ben Stiffen. Sie finb in bem ©arten ober (or) in bem §of (yard). ©r pat bie $ode be§ Officers. SDiefe Stühle finb nen (new). 2Bir fpred)en bon unferen greunben. S£)rei donate. ©rei ober bier Stage, fftein, mir fpred)en bott feinen Sd)ülern.- ®iefe Stabt f)at brei Stprme. gd) f)abe« ben ©tod be§ ©rafen. 3$ ^atte (had) ^meD greunbe; aber fie finb tobt (dead). ©in §unb l)at bier güfje. %&) habe bie güd)fe nnb bie Sßölfe gefefjen. Sie ^aben jmei geiertage. ©t ift in bem Sjtotaft be§ $önig§. Sixth Lesson. FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES. Fourth declension. The 4th declension comprises all the substantives of the feminine gender. . In the singular, feminine words remain unchanged m all the cases. In the plural they take either C, or It or Ctt. 4th declension. 37 1) The true monosyllables take e in the plural, at the same time softening their vowel. Example. Singular. ^‘jbie £mnb the hand 6r. ber §anb of the hand D. ber §anb to the hand. Plural. bie Spun be the hands ber §ctnbe of the hands ben ipanben to the hands. The other true monosyllables are the following 26: ®ie the axe. bie 5lngft fear, anxiety, bie 53artf the bench, bie 53raut the bride, bie 53ruft the breast, bie gauft the fist, bie grudjt the fruit, bie ©ani the goose, bie (Sruft the vault, bie §aut the skin, bie $luft the cleft, bie $raft the forces bie the cow. Plur. bie Sjte, bie 53änfe, bie $unft the art. bie £au§ the louse, bie Suft the air. bie Shift the pleasure, desire, bie 9kagb the maid-servant, bie the power, bie the mouse, bie 9iad)t the night, bie the distress, bie 9?ufs the walnut, bie ©tabt the town, city, bie SBanb the wall. bie SBurft the sausage, bie grüßte, bie ©cinfe, bie $iif)e, bie fünfte, bie ^käufe, bie pfiffe, bie Stable :c. Note. There are. some monosyllabic words of the feminine gender, which do. not observe this mode of forming their plural, because they were originally dissyllabic, and dropped their e; as: 2)ie $rau, old German bie Qfraue; bie Sßoft and bie ^onn from the Trench : la poste, la forme drc. — They belong therefore to the follow- ing class and take cn in the Plural. A list of them will be found in the 9th Lesson. 2) The dissyllabic and polysyllabic feminine nouns take n or ett in the plural, without changing the vowel , for all the cases. Words ending in ( or t have no C before It. E x a m n 1 e s. Singular. ^’|bie 53lume the flower 6r. ber 53lume of the flower D. ber 93lume to the flower. Plural. N \ ^'jbie 53 lumen the flowers G. ber 53Iumen of the flowers P. ben SBIumen to the flowers. Singular. bie Sdjmefter the sister ber ©djmcfter of the sister ber ©djfoefter to the sister. Plural. bie ©djmeftern the sisters ber (Sdjmeftern of the sisters ben (Sdflreftcrn to the sisters. 38 Lesson 6. Such are: 2)ie Dtofe the rose. bie bie 93iene the hee. bte bte Söunbe the wound. bie bte ©tunbe the hour, lesson, bte bte SBriicfe the bridge. bie bte $ird)e the church. bie bie $irfd)e the cherry. bie bie the pen. bie bie ^flanje the plant. bie bie ©d)ule the school. bie bie 93irne the pear. bie bie ©time the forehead. bie bie Xpre*) the door. bie bie barite the aunt. bie bie $nfel the island. bie bie 9htbel the needle. bie S£afd)e the pocket. Sippe the lip. 9?afe the nose. s Jftauer the wall. 9fbfid)t the intention, ©dpneidjelef (the) flattery, ©cfjönpeit the beauty. $rcmff)eit the disease, ^reifjeit liberty, freedom. 20iffenfd)aft the science, gheunbfdjaft the friendship, (Erfahrung experience. Hoffnung (the) hope. §iirffin**) the princess. (Gräfin the countess. 9M)Barin the neighbour, f. NB. Observe that all derivative substantives ending in ci (cp), Ijeit, feit, fdjaft, ung and in are of the feminine gender (see less. 10, B, 3, p. 55); likewise foreign words ending in ie, ion and tät, such as: bie 9Jielobie', bie Nation', bie Umberfität'. Exception The following two words of inflexion of this declension, bie Gutter and bie Stodjter. Singular . N. bie Tftutter the mother G. ber Gutter of the mother D. ber Gutter to the mother A. bie Gutter the mother. Plural. N. bie Wittier the mothers G. ber Mütter of the mothers JD. ben füttern to the mothers A. bie TOitter the mothers. For the few feminine words < § 6, and the foot-note p. 41. s (9lu3ftaf)men). are excepted from the mode but only in the plural, viz.: . Singular. bie Stodjter the daughter ber Stouter of the daughter ber Stodjfer to the daughter bie Stodjter the daughter. Plural. bie St öd) ter the daughters ber Stouter of the daughters ben Stö extern to the daughters bie Steepler the daughters, mding in nifj (pi. — niffe) see p. 48, Words. $)ie ©trafje the street. bie Siebe (the) love, bie £)ame the lady. bie Side the lily, bie garbe the colour. ba§ 93eifdjen the violet. *) This word is sometimes used without c: bie but is not so good. **) Nouns in in double their n in the plur., as: bie ^iirftinncn. Lesson 6. 39 ber finger the finger. bie Sarnie the lamp, ber Tftann the man, husband, id) fudje I seek (for), bie the milk. id) taufe I buy. bie Staube the pigeon. id) üerfaufe I sell, bie Kage the cat. id) fenne I know. fur^ short, reif ripe, rotg red. S. $d) liebe*) I like or love PI. ton lieben we like or love bu Xiebft thou likest, lovest (igr liebet) \ you (ye) like or er Hebt he likes, loves ©ie lieben / you love fie liebt she likes or loves. fie heben they like or love, lieben ©ie? do you like? Reading Exercise. 11. $)ie §anbe be§ 9Räbdjen§. SDie ©tragen biefer ©tabt. S)ie gebern ber ©änfe. ®ie £giiren ber Kird)e. ®ie ©table finb grog. §)ie garbe ber 9tofe. $)ie gltiget ber ©iene finb ftein. ^er Knabe ift in ber ©djule. ®ie Kircgen finb grog. S£)ie 9tofen unb bie Siliert finb fdjone (pretty) ©lumen. gdg liebe bie ©irnen. Siebft bn bie Dtüffe? 2>ie TObdgen lieben bie ©lumen. $)ie ©ögel gaben Gebern. £>ie ginger ber §änbe finb flein. gn (in) bem Söinter finb bie 9täd)te lang. $dj .liebe bie ©taufe nidjt; aber (but) id) liebe bie ©ienett nnb bie tauben. «Aufgabe. 12. 1. The hands of the ladies. I like the walnuts. The churches of the town. The boys have no pens. The forehead of the man is high (god)). I like the roses and violets. The smell (ber ©ernd)) of the roses and violets is sweet (angenegm). Our hopes are Vain (eitel). We know (fennen) the love of the mothers. The boys are in (the) school. The ladies are in (the) church. In three hours. The soldiers have wounds. Do you know these plants? The cherries are red. I know the daughters of the countess. 2. You know my intentions. He has two flowers in his hand. These pens are not good (gut). I love my sisters. The cats catch (fangen) mice. These pears are not ripe. My neighbour sells lamps. The lips are red. We sell our cows and our oxen. These two girls are sisters. My [female] neighbour sells potatoes (Kartoffeln). The mothers love their daughters. The girls have no needles. The pears are the fruits of the pear-tree (©irnbaum). Conversation. Kennen ©ie ben tarnen biefer (£§ ift bie griebridjSftrage. ©trage. 2Bo finb ggre Knaben? ©ie finb in ber ©djule. *) This is the present tense of the verb lieben, and all regular verbs are conjugated in the same manner. 40 Lesson 7. 2öo finb meine gebern? 2Ber fängt (catches) Sftäufe? 2Bie biefe ©djmeftern f>at gfjre Gutter? Verlaufen ©ie $irfd)en? Söie niete §änbe f)at ein Üttenfd)? 33on metier garbe finb bie Sippen ? §at ber ©otbat SBunben? Sieben ©ie bie Mjen? 2Bo finb bie tarnen? Sßetdje Blumen lieben ©ie am meiften (best)? 2Bie niete ©tunben tebte ba§ $inb (did the child live)? Söie finb bie ©tragen ber ©tabt? 2ßo leben (live) bie gifcfje? 2öo finb bie (Sänfe? SBer nerfauft Kartoffeln? , ©ie liegen (lie) auf bem £ifd). S£>ie Kajen fangen OTäufe. ©ie tjat ^tnei ©djmeftern unb bret trüber. 97ein, aber mir nerfaufen kirnen. (£in teufet) bat *mei öänbe unb jmei giifje. £>ie Sippen finb rotf). ga, er f)at niete SBunben. gd) liebe fie (them) nid)t. ©ie finb in ber Kird)e. gd) tiebe bie 9tofen, bie Sitien unb bie SSeifdjen am meiften. (£§ tebte brei ©tunben. ©ie finb fcfymujfig (muddy). ©ie teben in bem SBaffer. S)ie @anfe unb bie (Snten (ducks) finb in bem §of (yard). Otteine 9tad)barin nerfauft Kar= toffetn. Seventh Lesson. NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES. Fifth declension.' It includes merely the nouns of the neuter gender, except those ending in el, ett, et, tfjtU and leitt, which belong to the 1st declension. In the singular they borrow the mode of inflexion of the third declension, viz. the genitive is formed by adding eö or £, the dative by adding e, which may how- ever be omitted in ordinary conversation. In the plural, a distinction is to be made 1) between words of two and more syllables, and 2) monosyllabic words. The plural of the former ends in e, that of the latter in et with a modified vowel. 1) Example of a dissyllable. Singular. Plural. N.ba% ©efdjenf the present bie ®efd)enfe the presents G. be§ ©efd)enfe§ of the present ber ©efdjenfc of the presents D. bem($efd)enf(e)tothepresent ben ($efd)enfen to the presents A. ba§ ©efdjenf the present, bie ®efd)cnfe the presents. 5th declension. 41 Such are: ®a§ ©efejj the law. bag ©efpräd) the conversation, bag ©efdjäft the business, bag ©emefyr the gun, musket. ba§ ©ebirge*) the mountain, bag ©emälbe*) the picture, bag ©ebäube the building, bag ,3eugnif$**) the testimony, bag ©etjeimnifi the secret, bag 93efenntnif3 the confession. Flur. 3)ie, ©efeijc, bie ©efdjci 2) Examples o Singular. JV. bag $inb the child G. beg filibeg of the child D. bem $inb(e) to the child A. bag IHnb the child. Plural. N. bie $ittbcr the children G. ber $inber of the children D. ben $inbern to the children A. bie $inber the children. Such are: bag ©leidjnijs the parable. bag $ameef the camel. bag gnftrument' the instrument. bag ^omblimenf the compliment. bag papier' the paper bag iftetalf the metal. bag 33illet' the ticket. bag Concert' the concert. bag portrait' the portrait. bag Sineafi the ruler. te, bie ©emetjre, bie Metalle :c. monosyllables. Singular. bag 2)orf the village beg ^)orf(e)g of the village bem 3)orf(e) to the village bag $Dorf the village. Plural. bie Dörfer the villages ber Dörfer of the villages ben Dörfern to the villages bie Dörfer the villages. bag $hnt the office. bag 93Iatt the leaf. bag 33ud) the book. bag ©i the egg. bag 33ilb the picture, portrait. bag 9left the nest. bag §ufjn, the fowl, hen. bag gelb the field. bag Stf)al the valley. bag SBort the word. bag $alb the calf. Plur. bie Remter, bie SBIciti ©ier, bie Sieber, bie bag Sieb the song. bag ©djlofj the castle, palace. bag ©elb the money. bag Samm the lamb. bag §aug the house. bag SBetb the wife, woman. bag ®acf) the roof. bag IHeib the dress. bag Sanb the country, land. bag 23ie SBcforgnijü, apprehension; pi. bie SBeforgniff e. ®ag SBebUrfni^, the want; pi. bie 23ebiirf nif fe. ***) 2) er $8anb m. is the volume; pi. bie 95cinbe (3rd dec!.). 42 Lesson 7. Note 1. The same mode of inflexion is followed by all com- pound words ending in tljum, two of which are masculine: 2)a§ $aifertf)um the empire. ber Seidjtfyum the riches. ba§ gürftentfjum the principality, ber 3rrt|um the error. Plur. 3)ie gürftentfjümer, bie Seic^tpmer, bie ^rrtpmer :c. Note 2. Some monosyllabic neuter words, especially those ending in t do not take er in the plural, but e only, nor do they soften their vowel: 5£)ct§ .£>aar the hair; pi. bie $aare. ba§ $af)r the year ; pi. bie ct f) r e. ba§ 90teer the sea ; pi. bie 501 e e r e. ba§ £fjkr the animal; pi. bie Stetere. (For the complete list of them see p. 49, § 9.) Note 3. The neuter word ba§ §er$ (the heart) admits of an irregularity in the singular and plural: Sing. 2V. & Ac. ba§ ^er^; G. be§ §erjen§; D. bem ^erjen. Plur. „ „ „ bie Bergen; (/ ber Bergen ; „ ben ^erjen. SDie Aufgabe the exercise. ba§ §orn the horn, ber Körner the Roman, liegen to lie. id) fef)e I see. fingen to sing, ftnben to find, gefunben found. ffired)en to -speak, id) laufe I buy, gefauft bought. Words. berloren lost, leidet easy, light, runb round, flein small, grün green, neu new. fd)mujfg dirty. f)od) high, miebiel how much? Uiele many, bie meiften most. Reading Exercise. 13. 93ilb be§ $inbe§. ®ie Wilber ber $inber. 2)ie garbe be§ Slatte§. ®ie Blätter ber ^ßflan^en finb grün. £)ie Säume be§ gelbe§ tragen (bear) grüßte. ®ic Trauern jenes @^Ioffe§ finb |od). £)er $önig l)at Diele ©djlöffer. SDie Söörter ber 9luf* gäbe finb tcid)t. $d) fud)e bie Sämmer. 2Bir fjaben bie Kleiber gefauft. $n ben Heftern ber Söget liegen (£ier. ©ie ßmglänber leben (live) in bem Sanbe ber greifieit. 20o (where) liegen bie (£ier ber §)iif)ner? @ie liegen in ben Seftcrn. ®ie Ddfl'en I)aben §örner. 5)er gürft fiat ein ©djlofs gefauft. ®er $önig f)at feine Sauber, feine ©täbte uttb feine Dörfer öertoren. 2Bir fiaben unfere Süd)er gefunben. Aufgabe. 14. 1. This village is small. Those villages are also (and)) small. The laws of the Rbmans. The fields are large. The flowers of the field. The dresses of the girls are red. I see the roofs of the houses. I know the land (country) of (the) freedom. The children have 3found la 2 nest. The leaves of Prepositions. 43 the trees are green. I seek my books. I find the paper in the book. We know the castles of the princes. He is in his house {Bat.). Our houses are old. The girl sings a song. Have you seen the presents of my aunt? I buy two guns. The president has bought two pictures. 2. The books of the children are not new. These rib- bons are red. The doors of the rooms are shut (gefdjloffen). Those buildings are very old. We speak of (bon. Bat.) the presents of the king and of the queen. Our father has bought a house and (a) garden. The girls have bought many eggs. I find the words of my exercise very easy. These valleys are beautiful (prächtig). The village lies in a valley. We have bought two fowls. The boy has lost his money. Conversation. kennen ©ie bie $inber ber ©täfln ? SGßte finb fie? §aben bie $bgel defter? 2öa§ liegt in bem DZefte ? Sieben ©ie bie ©ier? 3n toeldjer ©tabt lebt 3f)t 3}et= ter (does your cousin live)? Söiebiel ©elb l)aben ©fe? §aben ©ie Gutter, unb ©ier getauft ? Söie finb bie flatter berjBaume? 3Bo finb meine $üd)er'? 2Md)e3 §au§ i)at 3f)t S3ater getauft? §at er and) einen ©arten? 2Ber l)at biefe Silber gemalt (painted) ? ©inb 3f)te 33änber roll)? 2öer l)at ba§ alte ©d)loji getauft? Söeldje Sauber finb reid)? 3a, id) fenne fie (them). 3d) finbe fie feljr fd)ön. 3a, bie meiften SBögel fjaben defter. 3d) fef)e bier ©ier. 3a, bie ©ier ber §üfjner. ©r lebt in granffurt. 3d) l)abe brei ©ulben (florins). 3d) l)abe biele ©ier getauft; aber (but) feine Gutter. ©ie finb grün. ©ie finb in 3f)tem JJhnmer. ©r f)at ^nei §äufer getauft. 9?ein, er f)at feinen ©arten; aber er l)at biele gelber. ©in beutfd)er (German) staler. Dtein, fie finb grün ; aber bie 53än= ber meiner ©dfibefter finb rotl). 2)er ©olpt be3 ©rafen 9t. ©nglanb unb 91merifa. Eighth Lesson. Nouns with prepositions. Very often the cases of substantives are governed by prepositions, which occur so frequently in most sen- tences, that they should be learned early. Those govern- 44 Lesson 8. ing the dative, the accusative, or both, are more used than those which govern the genitive case. For the present, we only give such as are most required. The prepositions are fully treated, lesson 37. 1) Prepositions with the dative: out of, from. feit since. Bet near, at, by, (with). non of, from, by. tnit with. 3 U f 0 » a t* mti) after, to {with place), gegenüber opposite to. E x a m p 1 e s. 2tu§ bem ©arten ( dat . masc.) from (out of) the garden. 3tn§ b e r ©tabt {dat. fem.) from the town. TO einem ©tod {dat. masc.) with a stick. TO einer gebet (dat. fem) with a pen. sftadEj b e m TOtageffen {dat. neat.) after (the) dinner. g^act) ber ©tunbe {dat. fem.) after the lesson, &c. 2) Prepositions requiring the accusative: £>nrcf) through, by. ot)ne without. fjj r for. nm about, at {time). gegen against, towards. Examples. ®urd) ben 2Balb {acc. masc.) through • the forest (wood). ®urd) bie Strafe {acc. fern.) through, the street. SDurd) b a § Staffer {acc. neat.) through the water, gur mein e n Gruber {acc. masc.) for my brother, pr mein e ©d)tneftet {acc. fem.) for my sister, &c. 3) The following nine take the dative in answer to the question »where?« indicating a state of rest, which is mostly the case. They require however the accusative after the question »whither?« with a verb denoting a direction or motion from one place to another. $ln (w. dat.) at. in*) {dat.) in, at. über over, across an (w. acc.) to. in (w. acc.) into, miter (place) under, auf upon, on. neben beside, near. unter (number) among, butter behind. nor*) before, ago. jttnftfjeu between. Examples with the dative (rest). Sd) ftefye an bem genfter {dat. neat.) I stand at the window. $luf bem Stifdje {dat. masc.) on (upon) the table, gti bem §ofe {dat. masc.) in the (court-) yard, gn ber 6tabt {dat. fem.) in (the) town. *) in and bor, when denoting time, always take the dative. Prepositions. 45 53or b e m fünfter ( dot . nent.) before the window. 33or*) einer ©tunbe ( dat.fem .) an hour ago. Examples with the accusative (motion) $dj gelje an ba§ $enfter I go to the window. $d) get)e über ben ghtfj I go over the river. $d) getje hinter ba§ §au§ I go behind the house. ©Men ©ie e§ Dor ba§ genfter put it before the window. 4) 2öät)renb during, tne gen on account of, and an = ft att instead of, govern the genitive case: 3Bdf)renb be§ 9tegen§ during the rain. 5lnftatt eine§ 53riefe§ instead of a letter. 5) Several of the above prepositions may be contracted with the definite article. The pupil should immediately render himself acquainted with these, as they are in very general use. 51 m for an bem, as: am $enfter (rest), at the window. an’§ for an ba§, as: an’§ genfter (motion), to the window. auf’§ for auf ba§, as: auf’§ Sanb (motion), into the country, im for in bent, as: im Winter in winter. in’§ for in ba§, as: in’§ Söaffer (motion), into the water, beim for bet bem, as: beim ©f)or (rest), near the gate. burd)’§ for burd) ba3, as: burd)’§ $euer ( acc .), through the fire, bom for bon bem,- as : bom 9ttarfte (< dat .), from the market. bor’§ for bor ba3, as: bor’§ fünfter before the window. über’§ for über ba§> as: über’§ 5CReer across the sea. 3 um for ju bem, as: gum $8ater to the father. ^ur for ju ber, as: jur Gutter to the mother. Words. ©er §of the yard. ba§ ©ad) the roof. ber $rieg (the) war. ber Stabe the raven. bie ©aube the pigeon. ber Trieben peace. ba§ 53ett thö bed. ba§ $rül)fiüd breakfast. ba§ 93tittag=effen (the) dinner. ber ÜÖMnter (the) winter. ber SOtantel the cloak. SBifijehn WiUiam. gefallen fallen. leben to live. bte 9tid)te the niece. bie $älte the cold. fpielen (to) play. fpredjen to speak. id) effe I eat. ftieg.en to fly. laufen to buy. mar was. $u Spaufe at home. Reading Exercise. 15. 3fn bem §ofe (im §of). 5lu§ bem ©arten. 5luf bem ©ad), ©ie ©aube fliegt auf ba§ (auf’3) ©ad). 3m $rieg unb im grieben. *) See the foot-note *) p. 44. 46 Lesson 8. ®ie $inber fpielen bor bem §au§. 23or ber 92ad^t. §)er Sßogel fijjt (sits) auf bem 93aum. 4)ie gifd)e leben im Staffer. 9ttein §ut ift (has) in’S Staffer gefallen. 3Da§ gebermeffer beS Knaben liegt auf bem £ifdj(e). ®er §unb liegt unter bem 23ett. ®iefe $öüert ©ic feine (none) in ©arten? gür mert (whom) finb biefe $irfcf)en? 35on mem f)aft bu biefe ©efdjenfe erhalten (received)? $on ma§ fpredtjen bie ©olbaten? 3ft 3f)re Gutter ju §aufe? •kein, icfj fann feine (cannot — any) finben. ©ie finb für ba§ Sö^terlein mei= ne§ ;kad)bar§. $on meinem $ater nnb bon mei* ner Gutter. ©ie fpredjen üom Kriege (war). D^ein, fie ift nidjt ju §aufe, fie ift an§gegangen (gone out). Ninth Lesson.*) Irregularities in the formation of the plural. Most of the exceptions, which in other grammars are included amongst the declensions, are irregular only in the plural. We therefore think it proper to range them all under one head. I. Irregularities of the first declension. § 1. The following substantives take It in the plural without modifying the vowel: ®er Saier the Bavarian. ber !ka(f)f>ar the neighbour, ber üßauer the peasant. ber ©tad)el the sting, ber better the cousin. ber Pantoffel the slipper, ber ©ebatter the godfather, ber 9ku§fel the muscle. Flur. ®ie SBaieru, bie dauern, bie Lettern, bie Sfauparn ic. Note. The word ber (Sfjftraf'ter has in the pi. bie Sfjarafte're. § 2. The words taken from the Latin in Of with the accent on the last syllable but one, form their plural in otett: 2)er Softer the doctor; pi. bie SDofto'ren. ber ^rofeff'or the professor; pi. bie Sfkofeffo'ren ic. Note. ®er sjkajor' the major: pi. bie 9kajo're. II. Irregularities of the third declension. § 3. Seven words take in the plural ett instead of c: 2)cr ©taat the state. ber ©porn the spur, ber ©traf)I the beam, ray. ber ^orn the thorn. *) The ninth and tenth lessons should be reserved for some weeks later. 48 Lesson 9. ber Sdjmer^ the pain. ber See*) the lake, bet Tftaft the mast. Plur. ®ie Staaten, bie Straiten, bie Sdjtner^en zc. § 4. The following masculine nouns take et in the plural, at the same time modifying the vowel: ©et 9)Zann the man, husband, ber ©ott the God. ber 2Mb the forest, ber Setb the body, ber ($eift the mind, ghost, ber 2Burm the worm, ber 3tanb the edge. j Plur. j£)ie Männer, bie 2Mb er, bie Seiber, bie 2Biirmer zc. III. Irregularities of the fourth declension. § 5. Twenty eight feminine monosyllables form their plural in CH, without modifying the vowel: 2)ie 2trt the kind, species, bie Dual the torment, pang. bie Sdjaar the troop. ber Ort the place, ber 2Sormunb the guardian, ber 2teirf)ft)um the riches, ber grrtpum the mistake, error. bie 23apn the road, bie 23ud)t the bay. bie 23urg the old castle, bie gaprt the passage, bie glur the field, bie glutf) the flood, bie gorm the form, bie grau the woman, bie ©luff) the blaze, bie gagb the chase, bie Saft the load, weight, bie $fti(f)t the duty, bie $oft the post-office. bie Scfyfacffl the battle. bie Sd)rift the writing. bie Scfjufb the debt. bie Spur the trace, track. bie ^pat the deed. bie £radjt the costume. bie Utjr the watch, clock. bie 2Baf)f the choice. bie 2BeIt the world. bie 2Baf)I the election. bie 3at)I the number, figure. bie $eit the time. Plur. $)ie 23af)nen (@nfenfmf)n e n railroads), bie grauen, bie Saften, bie ^3fficf)ten, bie Sdiladjten, bie Staaten, bie 3af)Ien zc. § 6. The termination e is assumed for the plural by two polysyllabic feminine words ending in niff and by one in jttl: 5)ie ^enntnijj knowledge; pi. bie $enntniffe. bie 23ejorgnifl fear; pi. bie 23eforgniffe. bie Xriibfaf sorrow; pi. bie Sriibfafe, :c. § 7. The two words: bie Gutter (the mother) and bie Softer (the daughter) form their plural: bie Mütter. bie Stod)ter (see p. 38). *) Notice : There is also a feminine word bie See the sea (= ba§ 2fteer) which has no plural. - Irregular Plurals. 49 Words. jDie (Sonne f. the sun. bie (Srbe the earth. ba§ ©cfylafftimmer the bedroom, fyett or flat clear, leben (meinen) to live. arm poor, reidj rich, ber Jpeibe the heathen. berühmt celebrated, immer always. Eeading Exercise. 17. S)ie (Stapeln ber dienen. 3)ie Pantoffeln ber Gräfin, £)ie SBauern finb nidjt reicf). ®ie Profefforen btefer ©cfyute finb be* rütjrnt. 3)ie ©trauten ber ©onne finb mann. £)a§ $inb leibet (suffers) grofje @<$merjen. 2Ber finb biefe banner? $)ie SBiirmer leben in ber (Erbe. SDiefe Ufjren finb fefjr ftein. $d) femte meine Pflichten. ®ie Konten ber 9iofen finb ftein. £>iefe§ 2anb tjat niete (Eifenbal)nen. Aufgabe. 18. Where are my slippers ? Your slippers are in your bedroom. The students praise (toben) their professors, but the professors praise not always their pupils. Those forests are very large. Do you know these men? I have seen two tall (grofie) men. I know my duties. These women are very poor. The peasants have cows and oxen. The beams of the sun are very warm. The cocks have spurs. The water of the lakes is*clear. Do you know the names of the gods of the heathens? The roses have thorns. The United (ner* einigten) Staates of (non) America are very rich. IY. Irregularities of the fifth declension. § 8. Seven neuter words form the plural by taking eil : ®a§ $3ett the bed; pi. bie S3ett e n (also better). ba§ §emb the shirt; pi. bie §emben (also Member). ba§ Jperj the heart; pi. bie iperjen. ba§ Of)r the ear; pi. bie Dtjren. ba§ 9Inge the eye ; pi. bie 9tngen. ba3 (Enbe the end; pi. bie (Enbcn. ba§ $nfeft the insect; pi. bie ^nfeften. § 9. A few monosyllabic neuter words do not follow the general rule in forming their plural: they take C instead of Of, and do not alter the vowel. 1) Those ending in r; ba§ §aar the hair. ba§ Jpeer the army. ba§ §af)r the year. ba§ 9Eeer the sea. Plur. $£>ie tpaare, bie Note. A second r would rend }y are eight: ba§ Paar the pair, couple. ba§ Ütofjr the read. ba§ Xtjier the animal, beast. ba§ 2d)or the gate. Safjre, bie £f)iere ic. iv the sound too harsh. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 4 50 Lesson 9. 2) Those which would he confounded in the plural with similar words ending in Ct*); they are four: 2)a§ ©d)af the sheep. ba§ ©eil (Üau) the rope. ba§ ©d)iff the ship. ba§ ©pie! the play, game. Plur. $)ie (Strafe, bie ©d)iffe, bie Spiele :c. 8) Also the following take e:**) £)a§ Sein the leg. ba§ SeU the hatchet. ba§ Srob the bread. ba§ Soot the boat. ba§ 2)ing the thing. ba§ ^ell the hide, skin. ba§ ^}funb the pound. ba§ ©ift the poison. ba§ §eft the copy-book. ba§ S'od) the yoke. ba§ Knie the knee. ba§ Soo§ the lot, fate. Plur. 3)ie Seine, bie Seile, ba§ Rejj the net. ba§ $ferb the horse. ba§ fRedOt the right. ba§ Ref) the deer, roe. ba§ Reid) the empire, kingdom. ba§ Rof; the horse. ba§ ©alj the salt. ba§ ©djmein the pig, swine. ba§ 3Berf the work. ba§ ©tiicf the piece. ba§ $eug stuff. ba§ 3^1 the aim, end, goal. bie ^ferbe, bie Söerfe :c. § 10. The following neuter words of two syllables take ct in the plural: 2)a§ ©emiitf) the temper. ba§ ©etoonb the garment. ba§ ©efdjledjt the gender. ba§ Regiment' the regiment. ba§ ©emad) the apartment. ba§ ©pitaf the hospital. Plur. S)ie ©emiitljer, bie ©efd)led)ter, bie ©ehmnber, bie Regimenter, bie ©pitciler :c. § 11. A few neuter words terminated in al and Ultt derived from the Latin, take tCIt in the plural: j£)a§ Capital' the capital, fund; pi. bie Kapitalien. ba§ Mineral' the mineral; pi. bie 9R in er alien. ba§ ©tubiurn the study; pi. bie ©tubien. Y. Additional remarks on the plural. § 12. Several nouns have a double form of the plural, when the meaning is different: *) For instance, the plural of ©<$af regularly formed should be ©d)äfer. Now there is such a word : bie ©djäfer pi. meaning the shepherds. Thus: bcr ©ciler = the rope-maker; ber ©djiffer the boatman; ber ©pieler the player, pi. bie ©picler the players. **) Most of them have a double vowel which does not admit of a modification. Where one has been dropped in the German orthography, it appears still in the English words, as : ÜBrob from bread, 5pfunb from pownd, ©d)af from sheep, &c. Irregular Plurals. 51 ™ , / the bench, pi. bte Sßänfe. ® ,e ® anf = \ the bank, pi. bic Santen. ba§ Sknb*) the ribbon; pi. bie timber, the bond, tie; pi. bic 93anbe. ba§ ©ing the thing; pi. { ™ (contemptuously). ba§ ^ f 4rf , / the face; pi. bie ©efidfler. e ' ^ i the vision; pi. bie ©efidjte. / bie Shorter = separate words. \ bie SBorte = expressions. ba§ SBort the word; pi. ba§ Sanb the country; pi. bie Sanber, and (poet.) bie Sanbe. § 13. There are a great many German substantives which from their signification cannot be used in the plu- ral, whilst others are wanting in the singular. To the first kind (no plural) belong: 1) The names of metals: S)a§ ©olb gold. ba§ (£ifett iron. ba§ Silber silver. ba§ Sfiei lead, &c. 2) The names of substances and materials: S)er .§onig honey. ba§ Stteljl meal, flour. ba§ SBad)§ wax. bie ©erfte barley. ba§ gleifd) meat. ber Sanb sand. 3) General and abstract terms, such as: ©ie Siebe love. • ba§ ©liicf happiness, bie $älte cold, bie SB arme warmth. bie $ugenb youth, ber 9tuf)m glory, fame, ber Sdjlaf sleep, ber junger hunger. NB. The pupil will observe that in German all such ab- stract terms have the article. § 14. Others from their signification require a plural, but as they naturally admit of none, the plural must be borrowed from similar compound words: £)a§ Sob praise; pi. bie Sobe§erl)ebungen. ber $atf) advice ; pi. bie 91atf)fd)Iage. ber (Streit contention; pi. bie Streitigfeiten. ba§ Itngliicf misfortune ; pi. bie Ungflfefctlle. bie (Sfjre the honour; pi. bie (Sfyrenbejeugungen. bie ©unft the favour; pi. bie ©unftbejeugungen. ber Sob death; pi. bie Sobe§fctlle. *) £>er SBcuib m. means the volume, pi. bie ÜBänbe. 4 * jj, of iuz lib: 52 Lesson 9. § 15. Masculine and neuter*) nouns indicating measure, weight and number, though having a regular plural, retain the form of the singular when preceded by a numeral and followed by an adjective or substantive: S&er guft the foot; as: fünf guf* (hot ^üfse) lang five feet long, ber the inch; as: t)ier 3oll breit four inches wide, ber (§rab the degree; as: gtoanjig ($rab teilte 20 degrees cold. ba§ Sßfunb the pound; as: brei $funb 3hder three p. of sugar. ba§ $aar**) the pair; as: gtoei ^ßaar Scputje two pair of shoes. ba$> ®u|enb dozen; as: 6 S£)utjenb £mnbfd)ul)e six dozen gloves. ba§ 33ud) the quire; as: jetyn papier ten quires of paper, ber 90Zann the man: fünf Jpunbert s Utann Infanterie 500 foot. ba§ Stüd the piece; as: neun Stüd S£ud) nine pieces of cloth. § 16. The following words have no singular: ®ie Sente people, bie Soften \ the expence, bie Untoften / the costs, bie 23eintleiber the trowsers. bie ©Item the parents, bie krümmer the ruins. bie Gotten the whey, bie Struppen the troops, bie ©infünfte the revenue, bie Serien the holidays, bie ©efdjttnfter the brothers and sisters. § 17. Substantives compounded with „ntatttt" mostly change it in the plural into =leute: £)er §auptmann the captain; pi. bie §auptleute. ber §anbel§mann the tradesman; pi. Die §anbel§leute. ber Kaufmann the merchant; pi. bie ^aufleute. ber Sdjiffmann the sailor; pi. bie Sdjiffleute. ber Seemann the seaman; pi. bie Seeleute. ber ©belmann the nobleman; pi. bie ©bedeute. ber §ofmann the courtier; pi. bie Jpofleute. Words. S£)er ©idjter the poet. ber grembe the foreigner, fdjäblid) hurtful, tapfer brave, ber Kaffee coffee, franjöfifd) French. blau blue, tief deep, ber Traufe the sick (man). bie Offene the bee. Reading* Exercise. 19. S£)ie Snfeften finb ben grüdjten ber $8äume fd)äblidj. £)ie Spiere paben gelle. S£)ie §aare be§ 9Mbd)en§ finb lang. ®ie frait* jöfifdjen §eere paben tapfer gefönten (fought bravely). ®ie 9Reere *) Feminine words are used in the plural, as: Dtcr ©den £udj four ells or yards of cloth; jefyn glaftfjen 2Gein ten bottles of wine. **) ©in s -paar also signifies a few, as : ein Sßaar Stage a few days. Lesson 9. 53 finb tief. Oie Knaben paben ipre §efte »erloren. Oie SBerle ber Oicpter finb berühmt. Oie SJtineralien liegen in ber (£rbe. Oie Kranlen finb in ben Spitälern. Oer grembe pat $mei paar Stie= fel unb brei Paar Scpupe. Sßiele Kaufleute finb reidp. gdp pabe fünf Pfunb fueler unb brei Pfunb Kaffee getauft. gep fenne biefe Seute nidpt. Oie klugen be§ Kinbe§ finb blau. Aufgabe. 20. These parents have lost all (alle) their children. We have sheep and pigs. My neighbour has no horses. The towns of that country are very small. The rich (reiepen) people live in the towns or in (auf) the country. The knives and hatchets are sharpened (gefdpliffen). Open (öffnen Sie) your eyes. We have two ears. In the hearts of the children. The bees are insects. The salts are minerals. The boy was five years old (alt). The sailors have lost four boats. The ships of the merchants are lost. In our town [there] are two regiments [of] riflemen (Sdpüpen). 1 speak of (»on) the battles (Bat.) of the Romans (Körner). Conversation. kennen Sie meine Stacpbarn? 2Ba§ »erlaufen biefe dauern? 2öo finb bie Pantoffeln meiner Gutter ? SlÖer ift ba (there)? Sieben Sie gpre Lettern? 2Ber finb biefe Herren? 2£o finb bie Sltänner? 2Ba§ paben bie Stofen? £ßa§ paben bie §äpne? 2Bie oiele Slugen pat ber SDtenfdp? SÖie Diele Opren pat er? Sinb bie Söhnen Sßögel? Sinb gpre Pferbe alt? 2Ber finb biefe Seute? kennen Sie bie Sßerte biefc§ OidpterS ? 2öie finb bie SJteere? 2Bo leben bie Slffen? gdp fenne gpre Stacpbarn unb gpre Stadpbarinnen. Sie »erlaufen Kartoffeln. Sie finb in iprem (her) Sdplaf= dimmer. Oie Hoftüren finb ba.- gep liebe alle meine Sßeftern. (£§ (they) finb Kaufleute. Sie finb im ©arten. Sie paben Bornen. Sie paben Spornen. Oer SDtenfdp pat gtoei Slugen. @r pat jmei Opren. Stein, fie finb gnf eiten. Stein, fie finb jung. Sie (or e§) finb Slmerifaner. ga, feine Sßerfe finb fepr berüpmt. Sie finb fepr groß unb tief. Sie leben in ben Sßälbern. 54 Tenth Lesson. On the Gender of Substantives.*) (93on bem ber Jpciubttoorter.) The gender of the German nouns substantive having been established in course of time, not according to fixed principles, but rather by custom and arbitrary use, ge- neral and precise rules cannot be given. This circum- stance renders the study of the German language some- what more difficult than it otherwise would be. The knowledge of the gender however being indis- pensable, we recommend the pupil, when learning a Ger- man substantive, carefully to acquire at the same time the article denoting the gender. We shall therefore ac- company each with its corresponding article. The gender of a substantive may be known either by its signification , or by its termination. A. Masculine (mftnnlidj) are: 1) All appellations of men and male animals: ©er better the father. ber SBoIf the wolf, ber ®önig the king. ber 33cir the bear, ber Setjrer the master, teacher, ber §af)n the cock, ber Stf)neiber the tailor. ber mher the eagle. Except the diminutives in cfjen and I ein, which are all neuter, as: bo§ Söterdjen, ba§ ©ofynletn the little son; ba§ £>äf)ne the boy. ber §afe the hare, ber 2lffe the monkey.' ber Some the lion. 3) The names of the seasons, months and days: ©er SSinter winter. ber Sufi July, ber Sommer summer. ber Montag Monday, ber 9kai May. ber f^rettag Friday, ber Skorgen the morning. ber Sbenb the evening. 4) The names of stones: ©er ©icmtcmf the Diamond. ber Cubin' the ruby, ber $te}el the flint. ber Stein the stone. 5) Most words ending in Clt (not cfyen), which are not infinitives:**) *) See the footnote *) p. 47. **) These are neuter, see C, 4, p. 56. On the gender. 55 $£)er ©arten the garden. ber IRücJen the back, her Stegen the rain. ber Stamen the name, ber 93oben the floor, ground, ber §aben the thread. Except: ®a§ Riffen the pushion; ba§ 23ecfen the basin; ba§ 2BabJ)en the coat of arms. 6) Four words ending in £)er Sdjnee the snow. ber ©>ee*) the lake. 7) All derivatives ending SDer $önig the king. ber £eb}nd) the carpet. double e: ber Kaffee coffee, ber Xf)ee tea. in «9, idj, i>'9 and ling: ber Jüngling the youth, ber faring**) the herring. B. Of tlie feminine gender (meibltd)) are: 1) All female names and appellations: ®ie $rau the woman, bie Königin the queen, bie Softer the daughter. bie Sfrnme the nurse. Except the words: £)a§ 9Beif> the wife; ba§ ^rauenjintmer a female person, a woman; ba§ 9ftctbd)en 'the girl, and ba§ Fräulein Miss; the two latter on account of their diminutive termination. 2) All dissyllabic substantives ending in e (not ee), with their compounds denoting inanimcde objects (S. p. 54, 2): £5ie SEhume the flower. bie $ir|cf)e the cherry, bie ©>cf)ule the school. bie 53inte the pear., bie ©tunbe the hour. bie (Sidje the oak. bie «Strafe the street. bie Sanne the fir. bie (Srbe earth. bie ©tyre the honour, bie Siebe love. bie Jpüfe***) the help. Note 1. Hence the sun is feminine in German: bie ©onne; but the moon is always masculine: ber 9ft onb. Except the three words: ba§ 5Iuge the eye; ba§ (Snbe the end; ba§ (Srbe the inheritance, in which words the final e is only added for euphony, for Slug, (Snb, (Sri). Note 2. Words like ber 91ame, ber Same *c. (see p. 27, Obs. 1) cannot be considered exceptions, as their true form ends in en: ber 9tamen, ber ©amen :c. 3) All derivative nouns formed with the final syllables cif) (old etj), Ijeit, feit, idjaft, nng and in: *) See the foot-note **) p. 48. **) For more words of this kind see p. 35, § 3. ***) See also the 4th declension p. 38. t) 35 a § (Si the egg; ber ©cfyrei or ba§ ©efc^rei the cry, scream; ber 93rei pap, are no derivatives , but roots. 56 Lesson 10. 3)ie ©djmeidfelei flattery, bie ©ftaberci slavery, bie ^reiffeit liberty, bie (Sdjonljeit beauty, bie greunbfdjaft friendship Except: ba§ Sßetfdjaft the seal for ^ebruar, February. 4) Few nouns ending in arfjt, Itrfjt, u(b and uitft: ®ie @dj(ad)t the battle, bie -ftadjt the night, bie 33ud)t the bay, golf, bie §ulb the favour. bie ©anfBarfeit gratitude, bie £murigfeit sadness, bie Ue6erfe|ung the translation, bie § offnung hope, bie Schäferin the shepherdess, and ber forming, an old word bie ©ebulb patience, bie ©cfyulb guilt, debt, bie Vernunft reason, bie s )(nfunft the arrival. C. Of the neuter gender (fätpd)) are: 1) The letters of the alphabet: bag 35, bag 9ft, bag 3* 2) The names of the metals: SDag (55oIb gold. bag (£ifen iron, bag @i(Ber silver. bag 33(ei lead. Except: ber ©taffl the steel. 3) The names of countries and places: granfreid) France; fftom Rome. — The article bag however is only used, when an adjective precedes: bag faff)oIifcf)e Spanien Catholic Spain; bag reiche Sonbon k . Except: bie ag Tftäbdjen the girl. bag $inbleirt the baby. bag ^augc^en the little house, bag 33liima§ geugnif; the evidence. ba§ 3Segrafmijj the funeral. ba§ 23ebiirfnij$ the want, bag ®ebad)tttif$ the memory, &c. feminine. ®ie ginfternifs the darkness, bie Kenntrtijs knowledge, bie Setrufmif) affliction, bie (Srfaubnijs permission, &c. D. Gender of compound substantives. The gender of compound substantives is generally that of the last component: bte§augtl)üre the street-door (from bag §aug and bie SHjiire); bag 2)intenfaf$ the ink- stand; ber Kalbsbraten roast veal; bie SBinter^eit winter- time; bie 2ßinbntüf)Ie the wind-mill, &c. Except: bte 9lntft>ort the answer (from bag SBort the word); bte ©rojsmutf) generosity; bie ©anftnuttf) meekness, and bte ^emutf) humbleness (from ber 9kutf) disposition of mind, courage). E. Double gender. The following nouns have a double gender on account of their different meaning. masc. SDer 33anb the volume, ber 33auer the peasant, ber (£f)or the chorus, ber (£rbe the heir, ber Speibe the heathen, ber §ut the hat. ber Kiefer the jaw. ber Kunbe the customer, ber Setter the conductor, ber Sdjifb the shield, ber (See the lake, ber 2d)or the fool, ber SSerbienff the gain. fem. or neuter. ®ag 33anb the ribbon, tie, bond. bag 33auer the bird-cage. bag (£f)or the choir. bag (£rbe the inheritance. bie §eibe (or §aibe) the heath. bie ,f)ut (the) heed, guard. bie Kiefer the pine (a sort of fir). bie Kunbe knowledge. bte Setter the ladder. bag Sd)ifb the sign (of an inn). bie See the sea. bag 3d)or the gate. bag $erbienft merit. F. Formation of female appellations. Most appelations of male individuals allow a female appellation to be formed, by adding the syllable til : fem. 2)ie Königin(n) the queen. masc. ®er König the king, ber gürft \ ,, ber |rin 3 r 6 prmCe - ber 9Jtoler the painter, ber ^adjöar the neighbour, ber Kiinfffer the artist, ber (Sngfanber the Englishman. bie giirftin bie ^rinjeffitt / the princess. bie 9)Merin the female painter, bie 9?acf)6arin the » neighbour, bie Kiittfiferin the » artist, bie (£ngfcinberin the English lady. 58 Lesson 10. 1) When monosyllable, Ser ©raf the count. ber $od) the cook, ber §unb the dog. ber SBolf the wolf. 2) If the masculine en< they modify their vowel, bie ©räfin the countess, bie $öcpin the female cook, bie §iinbin the bitch, bte SBotfin the she-wolf &c. s in t r this letter is rejected: Ser D^uffe the Russian. bie Muffin the Russian lady, ber granjofe the Frenchman, bie granjofin the French lady, ber Some the lion. bie Sömin the lioness. Exception: ber Seutftpe the German, fein, bie Seutfipe the German lady. (See also the Note 1, p. 66.) 3) When the gender of persons or animals is denoted by different words, the syllable tit is not added: ©er §errl^ e Mr ' ^ / the gentleman, ber Slater the father, ber Sopn the son. ber SSruber the brother, ber Opeim, Onfel the uncle, ber üfteffe the nephew, ber SSetter the cousin, ber $nabe the boy. ber Singling the youth, ber Sunggefeft the bachelor, ber ^Bräutigam the bridegroom, ber Söittmer the widower. Sie gran \ the mistress, wife. bie Same / the lady. bie Gutter the mother. bie Socpter the daughter. bie Sdjmefter the sister. bie Sante the aunt. bie Dtiipte the niece. bie Söafe (©oufine) the cousin. ba§ Tftäbcpen the girl. ba§ grctulein (the) Miss. bie Jungfer the maid. bie üöraut the bride. bie Sßittluc the widow. Ser Siger the tiger, ber Söinter (the) winter, bie 3eit (the) time, bie Sidjterin the poetess, ein Scpäfer a shepherd. Words. ber ©örtner the gardener, ber Sdjaufpieler the actor, bie dürfte (the) shortness, ber (Stein the stone, patte, fatten had. Reading Exercise. 21. 9tteine ©pre. Sene Strafe. Unfere Hoffnung. Sene Sanne iff pod). Sie Scpmeij iff fcpön. SBilpelm mar ein SunggefeK. Ser (Sommer iff marm. SSir fatten einen diamanten. §aben Sie bie gürftin gefeiten ? Sie iff fepr (very) fd)ön. tiefes grauen^immer iff fepr jung. Urtfer Opeim unb unfere Sante paben ein Scptop in Spanien (Spain). Ser ©örtner patte eine Sftofe; bie ©ärtnerin patte ein rotpe§ (red) Sßanb. ©eben Sie mir biefen 23anb ( m .). Sie grau patte ein §äu§d)en unb ein ©ärtdjen. JUtfgaße. 22. 1. My teacher. His friendship. The count and the countess. This man is a painter. That lady is a princess. Leeson 11. 59 My father is your neighbour. Your aunt is my neighbour. Here is a lion and a lioness, a tiger and a tigress. This woman is a widow. Where is the cook (/*.) ? My master is old. The baby is young. (The) winter is cold. This diamond is beautiful. Here is also a ruby. My sister is a shepherdess. This oak is very (fefjr) old. Give me a cherry. Which youth is your son? 2. The friendship of my [female] cousin. The earth is round (runb). The love of the mother. (The) iron is a metal. (The) gold is also a metal. The little house {dim.). The little horse. A little plate. The shortness of (the) time. Have you seen (gefeiert) the actor and the actress? My daughter is a poetess. I have seen the bridegroom and the bride. My uncle is a bachelor. His niece is very young. Is it a he-wolf or a she-wolf? It is a he-wolf. Conversation. SBo ift mein Steffe? SBer I) at mein ©tödd)en? SB er ift biefer Skann? SBer ift biefe ©ante? ©inb ©ie ein ©anger? §at $tjr ©l)eim ein §au§? tpaben ©ie bie SSraut gefeiert? SBo ift bie S3raut? 3ft ba§ ©ofb ein ©tein? tpaft bu ben Zünftler gefefjen? 3ft biefer SBinter fait ? §aben ©ie einen §unb? SBer tjat ein ©$fof$? 3ft 3$r Ofjeim ein 3unggefefl? SBer ift f)ier ? 3ft biefe§ St^ier eine Sömin? §at ber ©ärtner mein S3ud)? §ier ift er. 3br $inb f)at e§. Er ift ein Zünftler. ©ie ift eine ©idjterin. Stein, id) bin fein ©anger ; meine $rau (wife) ift eine ©ängerin. 3a, er fjat ein §äu§d)en. Stein, id) f)abe bie S3raut nidft ge= fefyen. ©er SBräutigam ift flier, ©ie ift franf (ill). Stein, ba§ ©olb ift ein SltctafL 3a, unb and) bie ^iinftferin. Stein, er ift nid)t fel»r fait. 3d) f )abe einen §unb unb eine §ünbin. ©ie gürftin f)at ein ©djfojs. Stein, er ift ein SBittmer. ©ie ©d;aufpielerin ift l)kr. Stein, e§ ift eine ©igerin. Stein, bie (Gärtnerin I)at e§. Eleventh Lesson. Declension of (Personal) Proper Nouns. (Eigennamen.) 1) The inflexion of Proper Nouns of persons should strictly speaking be formed without the article, and simply by the addition of 8 for the genitive. GO Lesson 11. N. $Ia'to Plato. G. Plato’S D. «Plato A. $Iato. Examples N. Subtrig Lewis (or ber S.) G. Subtrig’8 (or be§ Subtrig) I). Subtrig (or bem Subtrig) A. Subtrig (or ben Subtrig). ©cftill'er Schiller (S^iher’8 ©filler ©fitter. Christian names. $riebricf) Frederick.- $riebrid)’§ (or be§ griebrid)) fyricbridO (or bem ^riebrid)) griebrid) (or ben griebridj). Examples. §omer' Homer. §omer’8 Jpomer ftomer. of Such are: ©eorg George. $arl Charles. Ipeinrid) Henry. SBilftelm William. ©buarb Edward. goftann John. Note 1. The definite article is used before a Proper name, when it is accompanied by an adjective or a similar deter- minative, as: ber arme §einrid) poor Henry; Gen. be§ armen ^einrid). The learner however must not forget, that the use of the definite article together with the inflexion at the end of the name, is not good German ; b e § armen §)einridf§ would be wrong. Note 2. Masculine names ending in ft, j, ft, j or fdj, re- quire in the genitive, when used without the article, the termination en§, and in the dative ett: N. Söeift ©{ftulj 3tta£ grift G. Peiften§ ©d)u4en§ 3fta£en§ griften§ D. äöeiften. ©djuljen. Tftagen. Triften. 3) The same mode is generally adopted for the fe- minine names ending in e f and is preferable to the use of the article: N Suife Louisa. G. Suifeug or ber Suife JD. Suifen or ber Suife A. Suife or (bie) Suife fDla'rie Mary. ©life Eliza. 9Jlari'en§ or ber 9ft. ©lifen§ or ber ©life Tkari'en or ber 3)1. ©lifeu or ber ©life SDTarie or bie 311. ©life or bie ©life. Such are: ©miTie Emily. 3Jlar'garetfte Margaret. 3Ima'Iie Amelia. Su'cie Lucy. ©Iff abet!) Elisabeth. ^a'roline Caroline. §en'riette Harrier. goftau'ue, gmundjeit Jane. Note 1. Feminine names in ft take only 3 in the Genitive and remain unchanged in the two other cases, as: ©mma’§, ©ara’§, Anna’s, 9tofa’§, 2aura’§. Note 2. When Mary is the name of a queen or other historical person, it is 3)1 aria, as: 3)laria ©tuart, 3Haria Slftere'fia (impress of Austria) &c. Proper Names. 61 4) When foreign names end in a single 8, as: 91(= ctbi'abe§, ^lugu'ftuS ic., the article is required for the genitive and sometimes for the two other cases. N. $luguftu§ Augustus. D. (bem) 2fuguftu§ to Aug. 6r. be§ 9fuguftu§ of Aug. A. (ben) 21uguftu§ Augustus. Examples. £)a§ Seben be§ 9Hctbiabe§ the life of Alcibiades. $Der 2ob be§ ^uguftu§ the death of Augustus. gd) bemunbere 0o'frate§ (or ben @ofr.) I admire Socrates. Note 1. (£f)riftu§ always has the Latin genitive ©grifft, and $efu§ has 6r. 3Ufu, as: ®a§ Seben ^efn the live of Jesus. ®ie £ef)te $efu the doctrine of Jesus Christ. Note 2. The word ©ott (God) is considered as a proper name and declined without the article, as follows : N. ©ott. Gr. ©otte§ of God. D. ©ott. A. ©ott. 5) As in English, the proper name in the genitive without the article often precedes the other noun: ©d)dter’§ SBerfe the works of Schiller. JpomeY? gha'be the Iliad of Homer. ©mi'lien’S unb Jiofa’§ §anbfd)uf)e Emily and Rosa’s gloves. Note. The use of the apostrophe with Christian names is not general, but it should never be neglected in family names. 6) In the dative case, masculine names generally remain unchanged: with Christian names, however, the article is often employed. We say: bet pouter, bon mibt’§) of Mr. S. D. bem §errn ©djmibt to Mr. S. Ac. (ben) §errn ©d)tnibt Mr. S. N. & A. (bie) grau SBeber. G. & D . ber grau SBeber :c. Ex. : ®ie Regierung bc§ Hönig§ Submig the reign of king Lewis. Note. If, however, the proper name is followed by a noun substantive, without the article, the common name preceding re- mains unchanged, whilst the proper name must be in the genitive, as in English; Ex.: $aijer £>etnrid)’§ 5£ob king Henry’s death (instead of ber Slob be§ $aifer§ ^einrid)). Honig Bub trig’s Regierung. 9) If two or more names appear together, the last only is to he modified: griebrid) ©djifler’S SBerfe Frederick Schiller’s works. Harl griebrid) 5 § 9tul)m Charles Frederick’s renown. 5Uejanber §umboIbt’§ Reifen Alex. Humboldt’s travels. 10) When a proper name is followed by an adjective, in form of an apposition, both are declined as follows: N. Harl ber ©rof$e Charlemagne (Charles the great). G. Harl’§ be§ ©rofjen of Charlemagne. I). Harl bem ©rof$en to Charlemagne. A. Harl ben ©rogen Charlemagne. Example. ■liad) bem £obe §einrid)’$ be§ Vierten after the death of Henry IV. 11) In the same way, one noun being in apposition with another noun, must be in the same case: Give it to my friend, (the) doctor A. ©eben ©ie e§ meinem greunbe, bem 2)oftor 51. Note 1. If a plural of proper names is required, it should be indicated only by the article bie, without any inflexion, as: bie Racine, bie ©filter, bie Stiidert ic. — Some however may be declined as common names, viz. those of male persons with e, as: bie §einrid)e; those of females with eu, as: bie SBilfyelminen, bie $mei Marien :c. Note 2. Some Christian names both of the masculine and feminine gender my be changed into a diminutive by adding the syllable d)en, as: Harden, TOertdjen, Sui§d)en, DJtariedjen. — Euphony however will not admit of: §einrid)d)en, 2ubmigd)en. Lesson 11. 63 Words. ®a§ ©ebidjt {pi . — e) the poem, bie $arte the card, ber (Sieg the victory, bie Regierung the reign. ba§ ©efejj {pi. — e) the law. ba§ Sehen the life, bie Sliß'be the Iliad, bie lernte the aunt, ber DJlonat the month. lefen to read, gelefert read, erhalten received, id) benfe an I think of. angefommen arrived, ber fünfte the fifth, ber fed)§te the sixth, rufe or rufen ©ie call, geftern yesterday. e§ it. mar was. and) also. Reading Exercise. 23. ®er §ut §einridj’§ or §einrid)’§ §ut. ®ie 33üd)er SBiL f)elm’§ or 2BilfjeIm’§ S3üdC;er. Sorb 33rougf)ani’§ Diante. gd) liebe Sorb 53t)ron’§ ©ebidjte. §aben ©ie ©filler gelefen? 3$ §a6e ©fitter’s ©ebid)te gelefen. gd) benle an Suife. ©ie benfen an Dttarie. Spier finb Dllesanber §umbolbt’§ Briefe. ©ara’§ Gutter ift Irani griebrid) SBiltyelm’S ©öf)ne. Diiad) bem Xobe $arl’§ be§ ©rojsen. 2)a§ Sehen §einrid)’§ be§ Vierten, gdj fjabe bie Marten be§ §errn Hamilton unb ber gräulein ©d)tnibt erljalten. §aben ©ie (ben) Dtubolf gefe^en? stufen ©ie (ben) Robert. ®er ©ieg be§ D(bmiral§ Dielf on bei Trafalgar ift berühmt (celebrated). Aufgabe. 24. 1. Frederick’s hat. Lewis’ books. Mary’s sister. The reign of the emperor Augustus. I admire (id) bemunbere) Plato. Here is the horse of Mr. Stuart. The laws of Solon. The father of poor Charles is arrived. Have you read the poems of Goethe? I have read many of them (Diele baDon). I have bought two hats for George and Edward. Henry’s books are arrived. I have bought the house of Mister Smith. We read Cicero. We read also Virgil’s Aeneid (Dlencii'be) and the Iliad of Homer. Cimon was the son of Miltiades. Victoria is queen of England (t»on (Snglanb). 2. The name of Frederick Schiller. The life of Charles the Twelfth (be§ 3mölften), king {Gen.) of Sweden (Don ©d)toe= ben), was an incessant war (ein beftänbiger $rieg). The brother of Eliza, and Mary’s brother are my friends. Henry the Fifth, king of (Don) England, was the son of Henry the Fourth ; he married (fjeira'tljete) Catherine, the daughter of Charles the Sixth, king {Gen.) of France (Don granfreid)). Give it to my uncle, the doctor {Bat.). The leign of the emperor Charles the Fifth (§ 10). Where is Miss Louisa? She (fie) is with (bei) her aunt, Mrs. Walter. Conversation. 2fio mar Carl’S 53ater geftern? 6r mar in granffurt (Frankfort). 2Bo ift SuifenS £ante? ©ie ift in §amburg. 64 Lesson 12. §ür men (whom) f)a6en @ie biefe (Befinde gefauft? 20ie Ijeifit (what is the name of) ber $aifcr Don granfreid)? 28ie Reifst bie Königin bon ©nglanb ? 2Ber roar if)r ©ema^I (her con- sort) ? 20er mar @ofrate§? 2Ber mar ber «Sieger (con- queror) bon Trafalgar? 20er mar ber Setter 5lle^anber’§ be§ ©rofien? Bennett Sie bie ®efejje SoIon’§? 28er mar Salon? giir men finb biefe Rüther? §ür men finb Jene Member? SBem (to whom) geben Sie biefe Stofen? 2Ben rufen Sie? §abenSie 9ftiIton’§ „Verlorenes (lost) $arabie§" gelefen? giir $arl unb griebrid). ©r §eijjt Napoleon. Sie Reifst SSiftoria. ^ßrinj Albert. ©in berühmter ®er englifdje 21bmiral üßelfon. 21riftoteIe§ , ein gried)ifd)er SBelt* meifer (a grecian philosopher), fenne fie nirf)t. ©in atf>enijd)er SGßeifer (sage). Sie finb für (ben) §errn SD^aier. Sie finb für Ttabame SBalter. 3'd) gebe fie ber Suife unb ber DJZarie (or Suifen unb SJtorien). $d) rufe griebrid) unb §einrid). 9ton, id) ^abe e§ nidfjt gelefen. Twelfth Lesson. Proper Names of countries, places &c. 1) Names of countries, towns and islands have in Ger- man, as in English, no article: $£)eutfd)Ianb Germany. Sonbon London. ©nglanb England. Berlin 7 Berlin. ©Iba Elba. Except: bie Scfjmeij Switzerland, and bie Sürfei' (dürfet)') Turkey, which are treated as common names : 6r. and D. ber Sdjmeift; ^4cc. bie Sd)mei$. Thus also the names of provinces as: bie ^ßfalg the palatinate, bie Dtormanbie, bie 91Mbau :c. 2) They form their genitive by the addition of 8, un- less they end in g, $ or j: SDie f^Iüffe S)eutfd)lanb3 the rivers of Germany. S£)ie Strafen Berlin’s, 2onbon§ ic.. The streets of Berlin, of London &c. 3) When ending in 8, } or J f no termination can be added, and the genitive is expressed by the preposition bon, as: ®ie Strafen bon ^ari§ the streets of Paris. Names of Countries. 65 Note. The use of the preposition b o n is also allowed with other names of countries and towns ; but the genitive is better. Thus we may say: 2)ie ^robulte bon (Snglanb the productions of England. 2)ie ©tragen Don Sonbon the streets of London. 4) When the proper names of countries, places and months are put in apposition with the preceding common name, the preposition of is not translated: $önigretd) ^3reuf$en the kingdom of Prussia. ®ie @tabt Sonbon the city of London. 2)a§ ®orf ^oljrbad) the village of Eohrbach. ®er DJtonat Wax the month of May. 5) The other cases remain unchanged: 2Btr leben in (Europa (dat.) we live in Europe. $d) liebe gtanfreidj ( acc .) I like France, kennen @ie $ari§ (acc.)? do you know Paris? 6) To before names of countries and towns must be translated nad), at or in in*), from Don or au3, as: $dj gefje nad) 91tnerifa I go to America. 3>d) fd)ide $arl nad) SBicn I send Charles to Vienna. Tftein $ater lebt in ^ßari§ my father lives at Paris. $d) fomme bon Trüffel I come from Brussels. 7) We subjoin a list of the principal countries: (£uro'.pa Europe. Elften Asia. 21frifa Africa. 9lme'rifa America, ^luftralien Australia. Snbien India. (D)uia China. <£gt)p'tcn Egypt, ©nglanb England, granfreidj France. 5)eutid)lanb Germany. Oeftreid) Austria. SstaTien Italy. ©pa'nien Spain. ©ried)enlanb Greece, ^reufsen Prussia. @ad)fen Saxony. ®aiern Bavaria. ^tufjlanb Russia, ©daneben Sweden, ^ortoegcn Norway. SSänemarf Denmark. JpoKanb Holland. Belgien Belgium. bie ©djloeij Switzerland. bie dürfet)' Turkey. 8) The (national) appellations formed of these names of countries end either in tX or c. Appellations ending in tXl ®er (£uro:pä'er the European. ber <3pa'nier the Spaniard, bcr 91tnerifa'ner the American. ber ^talie'ner the Italian. *) At before names of towns is sometimes also expressed with 3 u. Ex.: at Frankfort ju ^ranlfurt, but in is the best. OTTO, German Conv.-Gr&mmar. 5 66 Lesson 12. ber (£ng'fiin'ber the Englishman, ber Oeftreicfyer the Austrian, ber Sdjottfänber the Scotchman, ber Scfymeiger the Swiss, ber Urlauber the Irishman. ber Körner the Roman, &c. ber Ipoftänber the Dutchman. These are declined according to the first declension. 9) The following appellations end in e: ©er ©eutfdfe the German, ber $rangofe the Frenchman, ber ®rie(|e the Greek, ber Sßreufse the Prussian, ber Sdjmebe the Swede. ber @acf)fe the Saxon, ber Stuff e the Russian, ber ^3oie the Pole, ber ©iirfe the Turk, ber ©cine the Dane. These follow the second declension (like ber $nabe). Note 1. The feminine of all these names is formed by the addition of in, as: bie (£nglcmbertn, bie Sdjmeigerin, bie Stufftn, bie grangöfin. — The only exception is: ©ie ©eutfcfje the German woman or lady. Note 2. The adjectives of these names are formed by add- ing the syllable ifd) instead of er or e, as: ffmnifd) Spanish; englifd) English; frangöfifd) French, &c. all spelled with a small letter. See the 18th lesson p. 99, Remark 5. Note 3. The adjectives of names of cities and towns are formed by the addition of er, which are invariable. They are used also as nouns as: of Paris ^ßarifer, subst. ber ^ßarifer, ber Sonboner, 9?eu=2)orfer, Berliner, §eibef6erger ic. 10) The names of rivers, lakes, mountains &c. have always the article, as in English, and are declined as common names according to their respective declension: ©er 9tf)ein the Rhine. 6r. be§ 9f£)ein(e)§. D. bem ^etn(e) K. bie (£I6e the Elb. G. and D. ber (gibe. Ace. bie (£Ibe. bie ^tjrenä'en (pi.) the Pyrenees. 6f. ber ^tyrenäen. D. ben jc. 11) In English, the names of months and days are considered as proper names, and receive no article; in German both require the definite article, viz. : ©er Sonuar January, ber $ebruar February, ber 9)tärg March, ber 5(brifi April, ber 9)iai May. ber $uni June. ber Sufi July, ber 9tuguff August, ber September September, ber Oftober October, ber 91 Ob em'ber November, ber ©eg ember December. in January &c. is translated im Sunuctr. ber Sonntag Sunday, ber 9ttontag Monday. ber ©ienftag Tuesday, ber TOttmod) Wednesday. Lesson 12. 67 ber £)onnerftag Thursday. ber Samftag ber ^reitag Friday. or Sonnabenb am Sonntag on Sunday. Saturday. ÜEöien Vienna, bie Ober the Oder, bie £)onau the Danube, bie gnfel the island, granffurt Frankfort. Words. $öfn Cologne. $ari§ Paris, bie Spauptftabt the capital. ba§ (Bebirge the mountain, tommen come, gefjen go. fait cold. Reading Exercise. 25. 1. ®ie gliiffe Jtufllanbg finb grof 3 . ®ie ^fjciler ber Sd)mei$ finb fd)ön. 2BeId)e§ (what) finb bie ^robufte (£ngfanb§? 2)ie Strafen 53erlin§ (or non 23.) finb fdjön. Napoleon mar in (£gt)p= ten. @r ftarb (died) anf ber gnfef Sanft Helena. gd) mar nid^t in Defterreid) ; aber id) mar in ^reu^en. SBeldjeS Sanb ift biefe§ ? 2)iefe§ ift ®ried)enlanb. kennen Sie $fjilabelpf)ia? 9Jein, idj fenne e§ nid)t, id) mar nid)t in 2fmerifa. gft biefer 9Ramt ein tpodänber? Jiein, er ift ein grfänber; er gept nad) 2Imerifa. 2. gd) fd)ide meinen Sofjn nad) $ari§'. ©u'ftao 2Tbofy>fj mar ®önig Oon Sd)meben. kennen Sie bie Stabt granffurt? D^ein, aber id) fenne bie Stabt $öKn. 2)er DJtonat 9ftai ift ber fd)önfte in ®eutfd)lanb. $£>er 9tf)ein ift ein großer gluf?. Üttein greunb ift im guni angefommen (arrived). 21 m Montag ober $)ienftag. $ari§ ift bie §auptftabt granfreid)§ (or oon granfreid)). Aufgabe. 26. 1. The four largest (größten) rivers of Germany are : the Rhine, the Elbe, the Oder and the Danube. The mountains of Spain are high (pod)). Napoleon was in Russia. The banks (bie Ufer) of the Rhine are beautiful. London is the capital of England. What (meld)e§) are the productions of Spain? The streets of Frankfort are narrow (enge). Where do you come from (üöoper' fommcn Sie)? I come from England, and I go to France. 2. My brothers go to Paris. Mr. Banks lives (lebt) in Germany. In which town? In the city \of\ Mainz. (The) December is cold; July and August are warm. The streets of Berlin are wide (breit). The houses of the city of London are high. Vienna is the capital of Austria. My nephew (is) arrived in September. The Danube is a very large (ein fepr grower) river. Come (fommen Sie) on Friday or Saturday. Conversation. ÜEßo maren Sie geftern? $d) mar in Tftannpeim. Unb mo mar gpr Gruber? (£r mar in granffurt. 5* 68 Lesson 13. 2Belcpe§ ift bie §auptftabt bon «Spanien? 2öo liegt (lies) Hamburg? 2Bo finb bie Sßprenäen? kennen Sie bie Scptoeij? 2öie peijjen (what is the name of) biefe jtoei gliiffe? .Sinb biefe sperren (gentlemen) granjofen? 2Bo ftarb Napoleon? 28elcpe§ (what) Snub ift biefe§? SSaren Sie in 9tfien? SBoper' (whence) fommen Sie? SBopin (where) gepen Sie? ©epen Sie nacp $ari§? kennen Sie bie £iirfei? 2Bie finb bie Strafen 23erlin§? 3n n)el(pem -DZonat ift 3pr DZeffe angefommen? $ln (on) toelcpem Stage? 2Bie Diele Stage pat ber 21pril? 2Bie Diele Stage pat ber gebruar? 3CRabrib ift bie §auptftabt Don Spanien. Hamburg liegt an ber (Slbe. t)ie ^prenaen liegen ^toifcpen (be- tween) granfreicp unb Spanien. 3

a§ für? and the sub- stantive follows immediately: für 33üd)er trauten ©te? what books do you want? ÜEßais für Säume finb biefe§? what kind of trees are these? The same form, ft)ct§ für? without the article is em- ployed before names of materials: für gleifcf) laufen ©ie, what sort of meat do you buy? für Söein trinfen @ie, what kind of wine do you drink? III. The possessive adjectives are: Singular. Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. mein meine mein my. meine my. beta beine bein thy. beine thy. fein feine fein his (its). feine his (its). % i^re il)r her (its). i1)re her (its). unfer unfere unfer our. unfere our. euer $f)re euere ^ } your. 35 « \ vour euere (eure) / J if)r ifjre iljr their. iljre their. The declension of the first three is shown in the second lesson. For the last five the following two will serve as examples. Singular. Plural masc. fern. neuter. for all genders. N. unfer unfere unfer our. unfere our. G. unfereS unferer unfcreS of our. unferer of our. D. unfer em unferer unferem to our. unferen to our. A. unferen unfere unfer our. unfere our. jy.3$ r 3ljre 3^r your. 3fjre your. 6r. $l)re3 Sljrer $f)re§ of your. $f)rer of your. T>. ^rem S^rer Syrern to your. S^ren to your. A. Sljren ^re $f»r your. 3l)re your. Observe that all these possessive adjectives have no termination added for the Norn. sing, in the masc. and neuter. Ex. : Our friend unfer 5 reun ^ ( n °t unferer Jreunb). Your horse 3$)r $ferb (not $f)re§ ^ßferb). (See also p. 21.) IY. The indefinite numeral adjectives are: masc. fern. neuter. Plural. jeber every, each, jebe jebe§. (wanting.) aller (all) all alle alles (all). alle all. Numeral Adjectives. 71 mandjer many a fein no Diel much menig little masc. fern. neuter. Plural. mandje mand)e§ mandje some, feine fein. feine no. Diele Diel. Diele many, tüenige menig. toenige few. beibe, pi. both, mehrere, pi. several. einige, pi. some, a few. bie meiften, pi. most. Declension. G. ahe§ B. allem A. allen N. aller (ah) masc. fem. neuter. alle ahe§ (ah) aber ahe§ aller allem ahe abe§ (ah). Plural. N. ahe G. aber B. ahen A. ahe. einige einiger einigen einige. Remark s. 1) When in English the definite article follows the numeral adjective all, it must not be translated, as: All the boys alle Knaben (not ahe bie Knaben). 2) 5111 before a possessive adjective in the singular, remains in the masculine and neuter gender unchanged. Ex. : All our money all unfer (Selb (not abe§ unjer (Selb). With all your money mit ah 3'f)rem (Selb (Bat.). 3) The article after both may either not be translated, or it precedes both, as: Both the sisters beibe ©djmeftern or bie beiben ©djmcftern. 4) Possessive adjectives, when joined with beibe, must pre- cede, and beibe takes it. Ex.: Both my sisters meine beiben ©djmeftern. Both our sons unferc beiben ©öl)ne. 5) The word some or any before a noun in the singular is better not translated, as: I have some bread id) fjabe 33rob. Have you any cheese? f)aben ©ie $cife (or $ä§)'? No, but here is some butter nein, aber i)ier iff Gutter. 6) Some before a noun in the plural should not be left out, but expressed by einige, as: Lend me some pens leiden ©ie mir einige gebern. 72 Lesson 13. 7) When, in a reply, some is not followed by a substantive, but refers to a preceding noun in the singular, it may be expressed by ftelcfyen, e, § or bab on; when in the plural , by einige; frequently however it is not expressed at all. (See the 25th lesson, II, Obs. 4.) Ex. : Have you some wine? Yes, I have some (to eleven). Words. ©ciS ©ebäube the building. bie ©Item the parents. brt§ ©elb (the) money. ber Kaufmann the merchant. bie 93afe the cousin (fern.). bie ütegel the rule. ber SSagen the carriage. ber gefjler the mistake, fault. bie Ueberfetqmg the translation. betounbern to admire. bie ^ßflanje the plant. ba§ ©d)iff {pi. — e) the ship. ber ^Beutel the purse. ber 9Sleiftift {pi. — e) the pencil. nüt)Iid) useful. tobt dead, reid) rich. fjeilfam salutary, wholesome. ba§ Vergnügen the pleasure. giftig poisonous. gehören belong, oft often. berfaufen to sell, berfauft sold. fd)led)t bad. ba there. Reading Exercise. 27. 1. tiefer Tdann ift reid). ®iefe grau ift franf. ^iefe $inber fjaben feine feid)er. gene§ £)au§ ift fef>r alt. ®ie grüßte jener 33äume finb bitterer (more bitter), al§ (than) bie grüßte biefer SBöume. Tdeine ©Item finb tobt. Itnfer Oljeim (Onfel) ift nid)t reid); aber feine 33afe ift fefjr reid). ®iefe ©tubenten Ijaben il)r ©elb bertoren. 2Bir fennen alte Regeln. gd) fenne feinen foldjen tarnen. 5XHe Tdenfdjen finb 23rüber. Tdandjer Kaufmann fiat fein ©elb berloren. Steine Sante fiat iljren Sting gefunben. 2. gd) Ijabe bie ^ßferbe gf)re§ €>l)eim§ uttb ben Söagen unfere§ 9tad)bar§ getauft, geber SOtenfd) liebt fein Seben (life). 9tid)t jebe§ Sanb ift reid). ©ie fiaben feinen gef)ler in gfjrer lieber* fejjung. Tdeine beiben trüber finb angefommen. Side §aufer biefer ©tabt finb bon ©teilt gebaut (built of stone). Side biefe ^flanjen finb l)eilfam. ^iefeS finb nicf)t meine gebern. 2Bir Ijaben einige $ögel gefangen (caught). 2öa§ für einen ©tod Ijaben ©ie ba? SJtefirere ©d)iffe finb angefommen. Aufgabe. 28. 1. I love my (Acc.) father and my mother. We love our parents. You love your sisters. The boys have bought some books. Those flowers are withered (bertoelft). The pu- pils speak often of (bon) their teachers. All men (Ttafd)en) are alike (gleid)) before God. These (I, Note 1 ) are the pen- cils of my brother. This man has sold all his houses and gardens, and all his horses and carriages. We admire such men. All [the] metals are useful. What {sort of) wine have Lesson 14. 73 you? Which gloves have you lost? This lady has lost all her children. Our friends (have) (finb) arrived yesterday. 2. We have seen several ships. I have found your purse without your money. We have several friends in Pa- ris. Not all men (-Dlenftben) are rich. Each country has its pleasures. I have no letters from my son William. Our king has several palaces. No rose without thorns (Bornen). I will (Sd) to iß) buy some chairs. These dresses are for both my sisters. Every bird has two wings. The boys have eaten (gegeffen) all their apples and pears. Some plants are poiso- nous. I give (gebe) these fruits [to] my little daughters. Conversation. 28er bat meinen ©elbbeutel ge= funben ? ©inb alle Sttenfdjen gliidlid)? 28a§ für ein $ogel ift biefeS? 28er bat i^n gefdjoffen (shot or killed) ? 28a§ für eine 23tume haben Sie? 2ßo finb unfere §mte? §abe id) gebier in meiner Heber» fe|ung? 2ßa§ für gebern haben ©ie? 2ßer ift jener junge Tßann? 28arum finb biefe ©tubenten fo traurig (sad)? §aben ©ie aße§ ®ctb oerloren? 2ßa§ für ^ferbe haben ©ie ge= fauft ? 28a§ haben bie Säger gefdjoffen? §aben ©ie einige gute fiebern? 2ßa§ für 93üd)er lefen ©ie (do you read)? 28 a§ fud)t fyriebrid) ? fKRit mem finb ©ie gefommen (did you come)? £mben ©ie Briefe non $ranf= furt erhalten (received)? Sf)r Gruber hat ihn (it) gefunbcn. fftidjt aße 9ttenfdjen finb glüdlid). (£§ ift ein 2(bler (eagle). $£)er Säger (hunter) tjat ihn ge= fdjoffen. (£§ ift ein Sßeildjen. Sb^e §üte finb in meinem 3bnmer. Sa, ©ie b^ben mehrere Rebler. Sch habe ©tabl(steel)febern. (£r ift ber Dieffe meine§ s had)bar§. ©ie haben il)r (Selb oerlorcn. 9lidjt aße§, aber oiel. Sch habe jtoei 28agenpferbe uitb ein üteitpferb (saddle-h.) getauft. Einige Spafen unb ßlebe (deer). 2lße meine fiebern finb fdjledjt. S(b lefc einige englifd)e 23üd)er. ($r fud)t feinen 2iegenfd)irm. Sd) bin mit einigen greunben ge= tommen. 9?ein, id) habe feinen 23ricf er* halten. Fourteenth Lesson. AUXILIARY VERBS. («fMlfSjeitlrörter.) 1) In German there are three complete auxiliary verbs which are not only used separately, but are also 74 Lesson 14. required for the conjugation of other verbs; they fjaben to have, come or to be. Indicative %d) fiabe I have bu fjaft thou hast cr (fie, e§) f)at he (she, it) has mir fjaben we have (if)r fjabt) *) \ ye have Sie fiaben / you have fie ^aben they have. are: fein (fetjn) to he; and inerben to be- •gmüctt to have. Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. $d) ^abe I (may) have bu fyabeft thou have er (fie, e§) f)dbe he (she, it) have inir haben we have if)r l)abet \ ye have Sie ^aben / you have fie f)ctben they have. 3d) ^atte I had bu fjatteft thou hadst er (fie, e§) fiatte he (she, it) had mir fatten we had if)r gattet or Sie fatten you had fie fatten they had. 3d) ^abe . . gehabt I bu gehabt thou hast had er !)at gehabt he has had mir haben gehabt we have had lie faben Sabt}y° u havehad fie haben gehabt they have had. Imperfect. 3d) fjatte**) I had bu hätteft thou hadst er (fie, e§) hätte he (she, it) had mir fatten we had if)r hättet or Sie fatten you had fie fatten they had. Perfect. have had 3d) I)CiBe gehabt I (may) have had bu habeft gehabt thou have had er f)cibe gehabt he have had mir haben gehabt we have had fie haben gehabt they have had. Pluperfect. 3d) hatte . . gehabt I had had bu fiatteft gehabt thou hadst had er hatte gehabt he had had mir Ratten gehabt we had had il)t tiottet gehabt» , ,,, ©ie fatten gehabt / y° ulla,lha,:l fie fatten gehabt they had had. 3d) hätte gehabt f) I had had bu hätteft gehabt thou hadst had er hätte gefjabt he had had. mir flatten gehabt we had had fie flatten gefiabt they had had. *) It may be stated once for all, that the 2nd person Plural of all verb: has two forms ifjr and Sie; the latter, written with a capital S, to distinguish it from the 3rd person, is the only used in conversation. **) This form is chiefly used after menu (if), as: If I had ItJCItn id) ... hätte (the verb is last). t) If I had had menu id) ... gehabt hätte. Aux. verb Mafien. 75 First Future. 3dj tuerbe . . Traben I shall have 3dj tuerbe haben I shall have bu tuirft haben thou wilt have er tuirb fjabert he will have loir tuerben haben we shall have (iljr toerbet fabelt) \ ye will have Sie tuerben haben /you will h. fie tuerben haben they will have. bu tuerbeft haben thou wilt have er tuerbe haben he will have tuir toerbert haben we shall have it)r it) erbet haben \ ye will have @ie tuerben haben / you will have fie tuerben haben they will have. 3d) tuerbe I shall have had. bu tuirft er tnirb loir tuerben ihr tuerbet (Sie tuerben fie tuerben Second Future. gehabt haben. 3d) tuerbe . . gehabt haben I shall have had. thou wilt bu tu erb eft thou wilt he will & er tuerbe we shall you will they will First tuir tuerben iljr tu erbet (Sie tuerben fie tuerben -43"^ <3* -43^ 3 s he will we shall | you will they will er tuürbe haben tuir tuiirben haben iljr tuiirbet haben fie tuiirben haben Conditional. 3'dj tuürbe . . haben or id) hätte I should or would have bu tuürbeft haben or bu bätteft thou wouldst have or er hätte he would have or tuir fatten we should have or if)r hättet you would have or fie t) iitten they would have. Second Conditional. 3d) tuürbe . . geijdbt ^)aben or idj It) ä 1 1 e gehabt I should have had bu tuürbeft gehabt Ijdben or bu bätteft gehabt thou wouldst er tuürbe gehabt haben or er hätte gehabt he would tuir tuürben gehabt haben or tuir hätten gehabt we should ihr tuürbet gehabt haben or ihr hättet gehabt you would fie tuürben gehabt haben or fie hätten gehabt they would Imperative Mood. §abc have. h a ben tuir er foil haben let him have. laffet un§ bdben fie foüetl haben let them have. Ijdbet or ljd6en Sie have. Infinitive Mood. Pres, haben or ju haben to have. Past, gehabt haben or gehabt ju haben to have had. Participles. Pres, habenb having. Past, gehabt had. let us have 76 Lesson 14. 2) The negative, interrogative and negative -interro- gative form of verbs is in German exactly the same as in English, and requires no further explanation. Negative. Pres. 3d) f)a6e nid)t I have not. ©u fjaft nidjt thou hast not. (Er f)at nidjt he has not &c. Fut. 3d) toerbe nid)t l)aben I shall not have. Perfect. 3'd) f)abe nidjt gehabt I have not had. ©u f)aft nid)t gehabt thou hast not had etc. Interrogative. §abe idj have I? | §aben ©ie have you? §ctbe id) . . gehabt have I had? etc. Negative-Interrogative, ipcibe id) nid)t have I not? | §atte id) rtid^t had I not? fmtte id) nidjt gehabt had I not had? feerben tt)ir nidjt f)ctben shall we not have, etc. Remarks on the German construction. As the chapter on the » Arrangement of words or con- struction« cannot he given untill all the Parts of speech have been treated, we may, for the present, remark: 1) That in sentences with compound tenses the German Part. Past must always be at the end. In simple or principal propositions the subject comes first ; secondly the auxiliary, thirdly the object (Acc. or Dat.); in the fourth place the adverb, and finally the Participle Past or the Infinitive. Ex.: $d) f)ctbe ein 33ud) gehabt I have had a book? ©er $nabe f) a t ba§ $8udj in ber ©trafje gefunben, The boy has found the book in the street. ©ie Gutter tnirb ifjre ©odjter in $ari§ fefjen. The mother will see her daughter in Paris. 2) Adverbs of time however must precede the object: ©er Ihtabe f)at geffern ein SBud) gefunben. The boy found a book yesterday. 3) But when any adverbial expression begins the sentence, then the verb precedes the subject, as: (Heftern babe irfj ein 53ud) in ber Strafe gefunben. Yesterday I found a book in the street. 4) The negation „ n i d) t " follows the (direct) object {acc. or dat.), as: 3'dj f)dbe ba§ 33ud) nid)t gelefen I have notread the book. Lit. : I have the book not read. Lesson 14. 77 Words. $£)ie Ugr the watch, clock, bie gutter the butter, ber the cheese. ba§ $leifcg the meat, bie SDinte the ink. glauben to believe, think, bie 3eit (the) time, bie ©efellfcgaft company, party. ba3 Ungfücf misfortune, bie 9?abel {pi. — n) the needle, ber Q3ah the ball, fo so. feine megr no more. e§ it. ber Sob death, bag that, menn if. genug enough, angenehm agreeable, pleasant, auf bem Sanbe in the country. Reading Exercise. 29. 1. $ie 9fcgt auf £ygre Kleiber. $(g merbe eine neue (new) Ugr gaben. gäbe eine Ugr gehabt; aber t(g gäbe fie (it) berforen. §aben Sie bief Vergnügen gehabt? 2. 2Bir fatten btele giftge gehabt. Sie merben ©efellfcgaft gehabt gaben. S)ie Sdpifer fatten fein ^ßapier, SBenn mir 93rob fatten.*) 2Benn mir gleifcg gehabt fatten.*) 3g* rnürbet fein ©elb gaben. ©r mürbe biel Vergnügen auf bem Sanbe gehabt gaben. ©lauben Sie, bag er ©elb gäbe? ©lauben Sie, bag mir SBein gegabt gaben? Sie merben SBaffer gegabt gaben. Aufgabe. 30. 1. I have butter and cheese. He has bread and meat. We had some birds. The boys had two dogs. I had a watch. I shall 3 have la 2 picture. I have 3 had ltwo 2 lamps. My sisters have had many needles. If I had a garden {Acc.) If we had a house and a garden. If you had had some paper. They will have no ink. Children, take (have) care of (9Icgt auf, acc.) your books. I have had little wine. She has had much pleasure at (auf, dat.) the ball. I had no time. They would have a carriage and a horse. 2. We have bad the [good] fortune (ba§ ©lücf), to**) have a faithful friend.f) They will have a house in the town. I should have money enough, if I had not lost my purse. To have**) good (gute) children is agreeable. After (the) death, of what use is it (ma§ nügt e§) to*) have had much money ? If I had not had so much misfortune. These young men (jungen Seute) have had too much (ju biel) pleasure. *) The conjunction menu requires the verb at the end ; if in a compound tense, the participle is the last word but one. **) When the Infinitive is accompanied by to, translate it ju, till further notice. f) Translate : a faithful friend to have einen treuen Bfreunb gaben. The object of the Infinitive precedes the latter in German. 78 Lesson 15. Conversation. §aben ©ie meinen SBruber nicfjt gefef)en? §at er (£tma§ (anything) ge= fauft ? §aben ©ie 33rob genug? fatten ©ie genug ^Butter unb $ä§? §aben ©ie biet Vergnügen auf bem Sanbe gehabt? §at biefe§ arme (poor) $inb feine Eltern metyr? Serben mir fd)öne§ Setter fjaben? Serben ©ie $eit fjaben, biefe§ SBud) ^u fefen? §at $arl üiet (Selb gehabt? Sa§ für eine geber Ratten ©ie? Serbe idf) ba§ Vergnügen fabelt, 3fjre ©djmefter gu fefjen? Sarum finb ©ie fo traurig? Ser f)at mein gebermefjer ge= fjabt? 3a, id) f)abe if)n in einem Saben (shop) gefefjen. 3a, er fjat §anbfd()uf)e getauft. D^ein, mir braudjen (want) mef)r. Sir Ratten $ä§ genug ; aber nidjt ^Butter genug. Sir maren fefyr bergnügt (pleased) ; mir Ratten grofie ©efelffdjjaft. (£§ f)at feinen Sater bertoren; aber feine Butter lebt nodf) (still lives). 3d) glaube nid)t. 3d) merbe tjeute (to -day) feine 3eit f)aben; aber morgen. (Sr f)at fefjr menig gehabt. 3dj f)atte eine ©tat)t(steel)feber. ©ie ift nid)t f)ier, fie ift in ©tuttgart. 3d) fjabe mein (Selb berforen. 34 to 1 ^6 nidjt (I do not know), mer (who) e§ gehabt fjat. Fifteenth Lesson. SECOND AUXILIARY. ®ein (fetytt) to be. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present Tense. 3d) bin I am bu bift thou art er (fie, e§) ift he (she, it) is mir finb we are ©ie finb \ you are (il)r feib) f ye are fie finb they are. 3d) mar I was bu marft thou wast er (fie, e§) mar he (she, it) was 3d() fei (feg) I [may] be bu feieft (fetjeft) thou be er (fie,, e§) fei (fet)) he (she, it) be mir feien (fetyen) we be ©ie feien (fet)en) \ ye be if)r feiet (fet) et) / you be fie feien (feien) they be. Imperfect. (Senn)*) id) märe*) (if) I were bu mär eft thou wert er (fie, e§) märe he (she, it) were c ) Ex. If I was or were rich tocitn id) reid) märe. Aux. verb fein. 79 fair Wären we were ibr wäret \ ©ie mären / you were fie Wären they were. Perfect . bin . . gewefen I have been 3d) fei gewefen I (may) have been bu feieft gewefen thou have been er fei gewefen he have been wir feien gewefen we have been (if)t feiet gemefen) \ h been ©ie feien gewefen / ^ fie feien gewefen they have been. Pluperfect. 3d) War . . gewefen I had been 3d) wäre getnefen I had been*) bu wäreft getnefen thou hadst been er tnäre getnefen he had been mir Wären getnefen we had been ©ie Wären gewefen you had been fie wären gewefen they had been. First Future. fein I shall be 3d) Werbe fein I shall be bu Werbeft fein thou wilt be er werbe fein he will be wir werben fein we shall be ©ie werben fein you will be fie werben fein they will be. wir waren we were © r Wäret) \ we re ©ie waren ) J fie Waren they were. bu bift gewefen thou hast been er ift getnefen he has been Wir finb gewefen we have been (ilfr fetb gemefen) i , b ©ie finb gemefen / y fie finb gewefen they have been. b u tn arft g e W ef en thou hadst been er war gewefen he had been Wir waren gewefen we had been ©ie Waren gewefen you had been fie waren gewefen they had been. 3d) werbe bu wirft fein thou wilt be er Wirb fein he will be Wir werben fein we shall be ©ie Werben fein you will be fie werben fein they will be. Second Future. 3d) werbe . . gewefen fein 3d) werbe . • gewefen fein I shall have been. I shall have been. bu Wirft j i thou wilt bu werbeft CO S thou wilt er wirb % he will Ö tv % er werbe he will £2 wir Werben r> > 2 we shall a! wir werben CO ► 3 we shall CD (itjr werbet) ©ie werben | you will er 1 a> CD (if)r werbet) ©ie werben J you will a* CD CD C i fie werben they will fie werben they will . First Conditional. 3d) Würbe .. fein (or id) wäre) I should be bu Würbcft fein (or bu wäreft) thou wouldst be er Würbe fein (or er Wäre) he would be Wir Würben fein (or wir Wären) we should be it)r würbet (©ie würben) fein (or if)r Wäret) you would be fie Würben fein (or fie wären) they would be. *) If I had been wenn id) . . . gewefen Ware. 80 Lesson 15. Second Conditional. $d) toürbe getoefen fein or id) toäre getoefen I should have been bu toürbeft getoefen fein or bu to are ft getoefen thou wouldst cr toiirbe getoefen fein or er to are getoefen he would toir toiirben getoefen fein or toir toären getoefen we should Sie toiirben getoefen fein or (Sie toären getoefen you would fie toiirben getoefen fein or fie toären getoefen they would Imperative. Sei be. feien (fei)en) toir \ 1 , , er foil fein let him be. iaffet un§ fein / ie us e * fie füllen fein let them be. feib or feien Sie be. Infinitive. Pres, fein (fet)n) or -pt fein to be. Past, getoefen fein or getoefen 511 fein to have been. Participle. Pres, feienb (fetyenb) being. Past, getoefen been. Note 1. There is and there are answer to the German e§ giebt, e§ ift, e§ finb; there was and there were e§ gab, e§ toar or e§ toaren, as: There are animals &c. e§ giebt ^f)iere ic. (See lesson 33.) Note 2. The English 1 am to is translated id) foil or mufj : Charles is to learn German $arl foil ®entfd) lernen. Note 3. The English to be right is translated in German : $ed)t Ijaben and to be wrong Unred)t 1) ab en. Ex.: You are right Sie |aben 9ted)t. I am wrong id) ftobe Unred)t. I was wrong id) Ijrtttc U. Words. *3) er Sel)rer the master, teacher, ber (Skofjbater the grandfather. ba§ ©la§ the glass, gliidlid) happy, lang(e) long, ungliitflid) unhappy, fd^ön handsome, pretty, arm poor. Irani ill, sick, untoof)! unwell, ju' too. Ijoflid) polite, immer always, ber 2 Bolf the wolf. gufrieben contented, nnjufrieben discontented, rubig quiet, beffer better, gütig kind. träge idle. leid)t easy. üergnügt pleased. fleißig industrious, diligent. aufmerffam attentive. toünfd^en to wish. geben to go. toarum why? Reading Exercise. 31. ®u b ift glüeflid). 3d) bin unglüdlitb- Sie ift fd)ön nnb rcid). 20ir finb arm unb Irani. (Sr toar ein guter Später. SBarcn Sie geftern in ber $ird)e? Ttein! toir toaren ju §aufe ; toir toaren Lesson 15. 81 unmof)f. Sie Herbert ni(f)t franf fein. S'd) bin bet (at) bem Sdjneiber gemefen ; aber mein fRotf mar [nod)] nid)t fertig (ready). Sft ber $nabe in ber Sdjule gemefen? 2Bir maren geftern int heater. Sd) mürbe glüdlid) fein, menn id) reid) märe. $arl mirb fef)r üergnügt fein, menn (when) er ©ie fiel)t (sees). (Set fleißig, mein Sofjn. Seien Sie aufmerffam. Sfm ©rojmater ift fei)r alt gemefen. Oleine ©rof$mutter f)at 9ted)t. ‘ Sd) l)abe Un= red)t. Sung unb }d)ön fein*) ift angenehm. Aufgabe. 32. 1. I am young, you are old. She is very handsome. Our cousin Frederick has been in London, but he has not been in Paris. Be quiet. Be contented with your situation (Stehe, /*.). I should be contented, if I 3 were mot 2 ill. I should be rich, if I had been in America. My daughters have been at the ball (auf bem 33all); they were very happy. It will be better to go out (au^ugefjen). It would be easy. The parents of these children have been too severe (ju ftreng). You are right, I am wrong. 2. I should be contented, if you were not idle. Be polite towards (gegen) your teachers. I wish, she were attentive. There are no wolves in England. There were (e§ maren) no glasses on the table. Be so kind [as] to (ju) give me a glass. My pupils will not be idle. Miss Caroline was very [much] pleased. The knives were not sharp (fd)arf). We should not have bought the butter, if it (fie) was not fresh (frifd)) I am to go to Berlin. Are we to learn German? I was wrong, my father was right. Conversation. Stub (Sie glüdlid)? Sft $f)re Sdjmefter and) glüdlid)? Sbarum ift fie unglüdlid)? 2Bo maren Sie geftern 21b enb (last night)? Sinb Sie in Stuttgart ge= mefen? 'S ft ba§ $inb lange franf ge= mefen? SSarum mar ber 2el)rer unju= frieben? 3ft er oft (often) unmof)!? 3ft ba§ 9)Mbd)en Oergnügt? Sinb Sie fertig (ready)? O ja, id) bin fel)r glüdlid). £) nein, fie ift }el)r unglüdlid). Sie l)at ade if>rc $inber oerloren (lost). Sd) mar im Sweater. 9Iein, id) bin nid)t ba (there) gemefen. (£§ ift ein Safm (for a year) franf gemefen. 2)ie Sd)üler maren träge. Sa, er ift immer franf. Sa, fie ift fcf)r öergnügt. SGBir merben gleid) (directly) fertig fein. *) See the foot-note f) P* 77. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 82 Lesson 16. 3ft ber 9)lenfd) fterblicf) (mortal) ? 2öa§ fagte (said) ber Setter? 2Ber bat 9tcd)t? fatten Sie aud) 9ted)t? £)er Körper ift fterblid); aber bie (Seele (soul) ift unfter6lid). (£r fagte: Seib rul)ig. 9Jtein 35ater f) a t 9ted)t. Diein, id) tyatte Unrest. Sixteenth Lesson. THIRD AUXILIARY. SSerben to become, to get (to be). Indicative. Subjunctive. Present Tense. 3d) Werbe I become, I get 3d) Werbe I (may) become bu Uitrft thou becomest bu Werbeft thou become er hurt) he becomes er werbe he become mir Werben we become mir merbert we become Sie Werben or if)r merbet y. b. Sie werben or iljr merbet y. bee. fie werben they become. fie tuerben they become. Imperfect. 3d) timrbe (id) tuarb) I became 3d) mürbe (if) I became bu iuurbeft (tuarbft) th. becamest bu mürbeft thou became er tuurbe (tuarb) he became er tuürbe he became mir tuurben we became Sie tuurben or il)r tuurbet y. b. fie tuurben they became. mir tuürben we became Sie Würben or if>r Würbet y. bee. fie Würben they became. Perfect. 3d) bin . . geworben (or worben) 3d) fei geworben (or worben I I have become {or grown). (may) have become {or been), bu bift geworben (or worben) bu feift geworben (or worben) er ift geworben (or worben) er fei geworben (or worben) 2C. 2C. 2C. ZC. Pluperfect. 3d) War., geworben (or worben) 3d) wäre geworben (or worben) I had become {or been). (if) I had become {or been), bu Warft geworben (or worben) bu wäreft geworben (or worben) 2C. 2C. . 2C. 2C. tuerben 3d) werbe . . tuerben I shall become or bu Wirft er wirb wir tuerben Sie werben J tuerben. fie tuerben First Future. 3d) werbe . . tuerben get. I shall become, bu werbeft er Werbe werben wir werben Sie werben fie tuerben werben. Aux. verb werben. 83 Second Future. $d) tnerbe getoorben (tnorben) fein I shall have become (been), bit toirft getnorben (tnorben) fein ZC. ZC. $d) tnerbe getnorben (tnorben) fein I shall have become (been), bu toerbeft getnorben (tnorben) fein ZC. 2C. First Conditional. $d) tnürbe . . toerben I should or would become {or be) bu toürbeft toerben thou wouldst become zc. zc. Second Conditional. Sdj tnürbe .. getnorben (or tnorben fein or id) toäre .. getnorben I should have become or been zc. zc. Imperative. ÜEßerbe become (thou). toerben loir \ 1 , , er foil toerben he shall become. lafst uttS toerben / le ecome ' fie follen toerben let them be- joerbet, toerben €>ie become, come. toerben ©ie nidjt do not become. Infinitive. Pres, toerben or $u toerben to become. Past, getnorben (or tnorben) fein or ju fein to have become. Participles. Pres, toerbenb becoming. Past, getnorben (or tnorben) become {or been). Note 1. The verb toerben is sometimes translated to get or to grow , as: (Sr wirb all he grows old. | (S§ wirb fpät it gets late. Note 2. What has become of . . .? is translated : 2S a S ift au§ ... getuorbeu? Words. @d)lafrig sleepy, nie or niemals never, tneife wise, fpät late, mübe tired. uaf$ wet. ungebulbig impatient, bie ^adjridjt the news, befannt known, ber §erjog the duke, plojlid) suddenly. ber Dtegenfd)irm the umbrella. fdjtnujjig dirty, bunfel dark. ber glcijs industry. bie ©parfamfeit economy. baS filter old age. bie Scute people, toann? when? grofs tall, grün green. rein clean. 6alb soon. geftern yesterday, jetjt now. Reading Exercise. 32 a. $d) tnerbe fdjlöfrig. @ie tnirb alt. Sic toerben niemals tneife toerben. Tftcine jtoei feinber mürben Irani. Tftan (a man) tnirb 6 * 84 Lesson 16. ntübe, menu (when) man arbeitet (works). (£§ mirb fpät. $d) mürbe gcftern ungebulbig. SDiefe Siadjridfd mürbe in ber ©tabt befannt. $dj bin Jung; aber id) merbe alt merben. Sie merben naf; merben, benn e§ regnet (for it rains). 2)iefe§ *ßaf>ier ift fdpnuijig gemorbett. (£§ mirb 9iad)t; e§ mirb bunfel. S)ie Knaben merben franf; fie effen (they eat) $u öiel. S£)a§ 9Diäbd)en mürbe mübe. £)urd) gleiji unb ©parf amfeit mirb man reid). U*fer 9iad)= bar ift halb reidf) gemorben. (£§ regnet; mir merben nafj merben. SBa§ ift au§ bem ©obn be§ ©d)neiber§ gemorben? ($r ift ©ol= bat' gemorben. Jtufgabc. 32 b. She becomes sleepy. I shall become wise. He has become my friend. The dnke became suddenly ill. The boys got tired and sleepy. The trees become green in spring (im $rüf)Iing). I am now rich, but I may (fcmn) 2become lpoor. We shall become contented. Do not become impatient. Your children have grown very tall. Old (Stlte) people become wise. It had grown dark. I was once (einft) young; but now 2 1 1 have grown old. It rains (e§ regnet), our friends will get wet. Mr. Brown hopes (fmfft) soon 2 to ($u) 3 get iri-6h. This man has become [a] soldier. What has become of his children? Those boys have become men (Skänner). I hope (icb b°ff e )> you will not become idle. Conversation. SBarum finb ©ie geftern nidjt gefommen (did y. not come) ? SB arum geben ©ie fdjon nad) §aufe (home so soon)? SBann merben bie Zäunte grün? ©inb ©ie Kaufmann gemorben? SBarum (why) ift biefe§ 3)läb= d)en franf gemorben? ©inb ©ie reid) gemorben? ©inb ©ie naj$ gemorben? SBa§ ift au§ (of) Sb rem Staber gemorben? SBa§ ift au§ meinem Sud) ge- morben? SBer mürbe träge? SBer ift fd)läfrig gemorben? ©inb bie ©tragen rein? $d) murbe jrtöjjlid) unmofd (un- well). mirb fpät. Sd) muj$ (must) urn (at) ad)t Ubr ju §aufe fein. Sm grübling. 9iein, id^ 16 in ©olbat gemorben. ©ie fm* öiel tadjen gegeffen (eaten). ^ftein, aber (but) id) münfdje reid) ju merben. $d) bin nid)t itafj gemorben; id) batte einen Ülegenfdjirm. (£r ift in Slmerifa geftorben (died). Sd) me if* (know) nid)t; id) b a ^ e e§ nid)t gefeben. £)er ©d^üler murbe träge. SB iff) elm ift fd)täfrig gemorben. Siein, fie finb burd) ben Siegen (rain) fcbmuj)ig gemorben. 85 Seventeenth Lesson. AUXILIARY VERBS OP MOOD. Besides the three auxiliaries already mentioned, there are others which convey no full idea in themselves, hut give certain modifications to other verbs, by expressing the possibility or necessity , the lawfulness or willingness of what is indicated. These are six: 3d) fann I can. id) mufj I must. idj toil! I will. id) foil I shall or am to. id) mag I may. id) barf J may or dare. The corresponding English auxiliaries are very defec- tive, whilst in German they are conjugated throughout. 1. können to he able. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present Tense. 3d) fann I can, I may 3d) fönne I may he able bu fannft thou canst bn fönneft er (fie, e§) fann (she, it) can er (fie, e§) fönne man fann one or they can mir fönnen we can mir fönnen we may be able if)r fönnt or fönnet \ ye can / ifjr fönnet 2c. «Sie fönnen / you can \ d) ftef)e auf einem f)of)en Sßerge. 2)ie $ögel fijen in ben grünen Räumen. 3d) Hebe bie furjen 5tage be§ falten 2öinter§ nic^t. 2)er tapfere «Sofbat fiat eine fdjtoere (severe) 28unbe. Aufgabe. 36. 1. The river is large. The large river. A large river. The good man. The diligent pupil. The diligent pupils. A faithful sister. A clever painter. I know a (Acc.) clever painter. The little child has a new dress. Mr. A. is a*) very strong man. (The) iron is a very useful metal. We hear the beautiful song of the happy birds. The American ships are in a large harbour. The rich count has a beautiful palace. 2. Miss Elizabeth is a diligent little girl ( neut .). My good old father is ill. The little house stands (ftefjt) on (auf dat.) a high mountain. We love the good children. We admire (b eft) unbent) the beautiful palace of the rich count. I like the long days of the warm summer. We speak of (t>on dat.) the short human life. These unripe walnuts are not good. I have seen the beautiful large English ships. A good advice (Dftafi), m.) is precious. Third form. Adjectives not preceded by any article. 1) The third form is made use of, when the adjective precedes the substantives without the article: The gender not being indicated by an article, it must be expressed by the ending of the adjective itself. This form there- fore is declined by three genders in the singular; the plural has only one termination for all the genders, like the definite article. IPIT“ With the verb to be always use the nominative case. Adjectives. 97 Examples. Singular. Plural. Masculine. N. guter SBein good wine. gute 2Beine good wines. G. guten 2öeine§ guter SBeine D. gutem 2Bein(e) guten 2B einen A. guten 2Bein. gute 2Beine. Feminine. N. marme ©ugge warm soup. marme ©ubben warm soups. G. marmer ©upbe marmer ©uppen D. marmer ©uppe marme n ©upb^t A. marme ©uppe. marme ©ugpen. Neuter. N. frifdje8 SBajjer fresh water. neue 53üd)er new books. G. frifdjen 2Bafjer§ neuer Sßücfjer D. frifc^em SBajfer neuen 93ii(f)ern A. frifdfjeS Staffer. neue üßüdjer. Note. The learner will easily see that these endings of the 3rd form are the terminations of the missing article b e r , bte, b a §. The only case which differs, is the Gen. sing., which should accor- dingly be: gute§. Here an n has been substituted, to avoid the repetition of several s (8). 2) When two or more adjectives are placed before the same substantive without an article, they are de- clined in the same way, as: N. guter, alter, rotfyer SBein (some) good old red wine G. guten, alten, rotten 2öeine§ of good old red wine D. gutem, altem, rotl)em SBeine to good old red wine A. guten, alten, rotten 2Bein (some) good old red wine. N. reidje, gütige Seute rich kind people G. reiser, gütiger Seute of rich kind people D. reichen, gütigen Seuten to rich kind people A. reiche, gütige Seute rich kind people. 3) This third form is also used for the vocative case without or with a personal pronoun: firmer DJtonn ! arme§ 9)tabd>en ! poor man ! poor girl ! $d) (bu, ©ie) armer Tftann ! I (thou, you) poor man ! Sieben $inb ! dear child ! | Siebe ^inber ! dear children ! $unge Seute or if>r junge Seute (you) young people! 4) With cardinal numbers and the five numeral ad- ectives: einige, mehrere, Diele, mandje and menige (not alle) : 3et)n tapfere Tftänncr ten brave men. $iele (menige) treue ^reunbe many (few) true friends. $ünf jd)önc ^ßferbe five beautiful horses. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 7 98 Lesson 18. 5) After a Genitive this third form is also used: §einrid)’S gröfjteS Vergnügen Henry’s greatest pleasure. ®ic 9kutter, beren Heine $inber :c. The mother whose little children &c. * §err $8ell, mit beffert jüngftem (Sofjne id) reifte. Mr. Bell with whose youngest son I travelled. Additional remarks. 1) Adjectives ending in el, as: ebel noble, eitel vain, bunfel dark, lose, when declined, in the Nom. the e before 1*): N. ber eble ©raf (not ebele) bie eitle grau G. be§ eblen or ebeln*) ©rafen ber eitlen grau D. bem eblen ©rafen 2C. ber eitlen grau :c. 2) Those ending in et do not require the omission of the e in the Nominative, except in poetry; but in the other cases they take only u after r, as: ©in bitterer Stranf a bitter potion. G. eines bittern StranfS. ©ine finftere 9?ad)t a dark night. G. & JD. einer finft e r n 9?ad)t. 3) The adjective l)5d) remains unchanged when after its noun, but when before , it changes in all the cases the $ into a simple I). We say: £)er 95autn ift Ijöd); but: N. ber 1) o 1) e 33aum, pi. b i e 1) o 1) en 93äume the high trees. G. beS Rolfen 23aume§. pi. l)ol je $8äume high trees; &c. 4) Many adjectives are roots and monosyllables as in Eng- lish, such as: arm, reid), Jung, alt, fiif$ (sweet), rein 2c. But the greater number are derivatives, and may be known by the following syllables affixed to a substantive or verb: *bar: frudjtbar fertile; foftbar precious. »en: golben golden; eidfen oaken; feiben silken. = ern: {jölgern wooden; eifern iron; fteinern of stone. sty aft: tugenbdfaft virtuous; bo§l)aft wicked. sig: fleißig diligent; artig pretty; prädftig magnificent. = i^t: fteinicfyt stony; bergidft mountainous, hilly. sifdf: fyimmlifd) heavenly; linbifdj childish. slid): l)errlid) splendid; lieblid) lovely; föniglid) royal, kingly. s 1 o § : grenzenlos boundles ; el)rloS infamous. sfam: furdftfam timid; ge^orfam obedient; graufam cruel. *) This other way of declining: be§ ebeln, eit ein; pi. bie ebeln (for eblen) is also sometimes met with. Adjectives. 99 Likewise with: = reid): fimtretdt) ingenious; fifdjreid) abounding with fish. = t)oU: geiftüofl talented, witty; pradjtüofl magnificent. = tp ü r b t g : Iieben§Wiirbig amiable; efyrwiirbig venerable. ^Wertf): lobenswerte praise-worthy ; wiinfd)en§wertl) desirable. 5) Adjectives denoting a nation are mostly formed by the termination = ifd), and written with a small letter, as: amerifanifd) American, bänifdj Danish, b e u t f cf) *) German, englifdj English, franjofifd) French, italienifd^ Italian. gried)ifd) Greek. §oIIanbif(f) Dutch. öfterreidjifd) Austrian, bolnifd) Polish, prenffifcfj Prussian, ruffifd) Russian, fadjfifdj Saxon, fdjwebifd) Swedish, fpanifcf) Spanish, tiirfifd) Turkish. 6) Adjectives may be converted into substantives. In this case they take the article, and must be written with a ca- pital letter, but retain their inflexion as adjectives. Ex.: Adj. fremb, reifenb, beutfd), gefangen. First form. Declension. Second form. N. ber grembe the stranger 6r. be§ gremben of the stranger JD. bem gtowben to the stranger A. ben $remben the stranger. ein gr ember a stranger eine§ $remben of a stranger einem gremben to a stranger einen $remben a stranger. I. & II. form. Plural. III. form. N. tie grembeu the strangers 6r. bet §remben of the strangers I). ben §remben to the strangers A. bie §remben the strangers. grembe strangers §r ember of strangers ^rernben to strangers grembe strangers. Such are: ber Steifenbc the traveller. — ein Üteifenbcr a traveller, ber (belehrte the learned man. — ein (belehrter a 1. man. ber Gebiente the man-seivant. — ein Gebienter a servant, ber 2)eutfd)e the German. — ein S£>eutfd)er a German, ber (befanbte the ambassador. — ein (befanbteranambassad: ber (befangene the prisoner. — ein (befangener a prisoner. 7) Even neuter nouns are formed in this manner, as: £)a§ (Sdjöne the beautiful. | (buteä tljun to do good. ba§ 9?eue, ba§ 5üte that which is new (old). 8) After etwa§ something or anything, nid)t§ nothing, Diel, Wenig and me^r the adjectives used substantively take the third form (— e§), as: *) In beutle the i has been dropped before \6). (from beuHfd)). 1 7 * 100 Lesson 18. $iel ©uteS much good. [ IticijtS HeueS nothing new (no ©tmaS ©Riecht eS something or anything bad. [news). 20ir fyrechen t»on etmaS liütflichem (Dat.). We are speaking of something useful. £)er grilling spring. baS better the weather. baS ©tiicf the morsel, piece. baS ÜBier beer, bie lltilcl) milk, mohnen to dwell, live, midjtig important, bie ^IXpert the Alps, bie $ranff)eit the disease, ber 33edjer the cup, goblet, bie Steife the journey, bie ©iite the kindness. Words. ein Arbeiter a workman, bie Arbeit the work, bie ©efimbfjeit (the) health, frifdj fresh. fchmach feeble, angenehm agreeable, pleasant. nü|li(f) useful, blinb blind, blau blue, grau grey, fdfnmrjs black. meifj white, gefährlich dangerous. Dohbriugeu to perform, immer always. Reading Exercise. 37. 1. ©ie füften $irfdjen f)aben einen angenehmen ©efehmaef (taste). 2)er liebliche Frühling ift gelommen. griff t)dbe bie b r äat biefen gotbenen 9iing nertoren? Jpat ber 33äder (baker) gutes 33rob? 5Son metier garbe finb bie ge= bern ber Dhtben? §aben ©ie einen fdjmarjen ober einen meinen §ut? Dlein, er ift nidjt fefjr tief. 3a, er ift ein fleißiger $nabe. ©in berühmter, beutfd^cr 9ttater. ©r §ei§t Sßinterfjafter. ©ie finb in meinem neuen §aufe. Ttein, er ift nidjt fefjr grof$. 3$ liebe ben rotten unb ben meinen. 2Bir ^aben gebratenes unb ge- fodjteS 2 ) (boiled). 3d) fyabe feine fiifse 9ttild); aber frifdje Butter. ©r ift in ber ©djule. O ja; aber id) liebe bie italienifdje met)r (better). 3d) fpredtje ein rnenig (a little). 3a, id) fjabe jeben £ag eine ©tunbe. !Dleine ©d)mefter 9fnna fjat ifjn oertoren. ©r oerfauft immer gutes 33rob. ®ie gebern ber föaben finb fdjttmrj. 3d) l)abe jmei §üte, einen fdjtnar- $en unb einen meinen. Nineteenth Lesson. Degrees of comparison. 1) The comparison, in German as in English, is ef- fected by two degrees, the comparative and superlative. 1) The conjunction bob (that) requires the verb at the end of the sentence. 2) Participles are declined like adjectives. 102 Lesson 19. The comparative degree is formed by the addition of et, or when the adjective ends in e, only r , the superlative by adding ft or ftc, precisely as in the English language. Further the vowels a, 0, U are changed in most mono- syllables into ft, 0, Ü in both degrees. Comp. Superlative 1st form. 2nd form. 9teid) rich reicher ber, fcbiht handsome fcböner lang long länger = alt old alter = arm poor ärmer = ftarf strong ftärfer fromm pious frömmer = bie, ba§ rcicf)ft=c or am reichten. = fd)onfte = am fc^onften. - = längfte = am längften. * = ält(e)fte = am älteften. * - ärrnfie = am ärmften. * = ftärffte = am ftärfften. = = frömmfte = am frömmften. 2) In the comparative degree of adjectives in el (not er or en) the e is dropped before 1, as: ebel noble, Comp, ebler, Sup. ber ebelfte; but: bitter bitter, „ bitterer (not bittrer) „ ber bitterfte. 3) In the superlative of adjectives ending in three consonants or in a hissing sound (•$, §, js, fd)) an e is inserted before ft for euphony (efte), as: Comp. Superl. ©d)Iecf)t bad fd)leinte blacker ink. Newt. N. & A. fdpnereS SBetter finer weather. Third form plur. Plur. N. & A. fdpnere Blumen. G. fe^önerer Humen zc. Note. We must remark that, when two adjectives are com- pared with one another, which seldom occurs, this must be done by the word mel)r (= rather). Ex.: (Sr ttrnr mefjr gliidlid) al§ tapfer. He was more (rather) successful than brave. 8) In comparative sentences, as followed by an ad- jective and as, is rendered in German by ebenfo — al3 or foie, and not so — as, by nid)t fo — a 13 or tute. Ex.: (Sr iff ebenfo jung al§ id) or to ie id) he is as young as I. Lesson 19. 105 $arl mar nidjt fo gliidlid), al§ fein $reunb 20ill)efm. Charles was not so happy as his friend William. 9) As — again answers to the German nod) einmal fo or boppelt fo — . Ex.: (£r ift nod) einmal fo alt (or boppelt fo alt) al§ (or mie) id). He is as old again as I. 10) When a relation between two comparatives is expressed, the English the — the before them is to be translated je — b eft o. Ex.: $e t)öl)er ber $8erg, befto tiefer ba§ £f)al. The higher the hill, the deeper the valley, ruhiger ein Seben ift, befto gliidlidjer ift e§. The quieter a life is, the happier it is. (See the 36th lesson on the Conjunctions, 3rd class.) Words. ®er See the lake. ba§ TReer the sea. ein 3§eild)en a violet. ber 2lbler the eagle. ber Flügel the wing. bie dralle the claw. ber $lat$ the square, place. breit wide, broad. bie Slugenb virtue. ber Stord) the stork. ber §al§ the neck. bie (San§ the goose. ber Straujs {pi. — e) the ostrich. bie *ftad)barin the neighbour, f. ber gelbperr the general. ba§ 53lei (the) lead. ba§ Tupfer copper. bie Starte the strength. ber 2£eg the way. gefunben found. tief deep. prddjtig beautiful. leidjt light, fd)arf sharp. freigebig liberal, ftreng strict. nngliidlid) unfortunate. ungefdjidi unskilful. meit far. al§ than. Reading Exercise. 39. 1. £)er breite glufj. $er breitere (See. $)a§ breitfte 9Reer. 2)er glufj ift tief; ber (See ift tiefer al§ ber glufj; ba§ TReer ift am tiefften. $arl ift ftärfer al§ äßilfjelm; er ift ber ftärffte $nabe. ÜRarie ift fleißiger al§ (Sara. 3)u f)aft ein fdjöne* 93eild)en gefunben; aber id) f)abe ein fd)önere§. TReiue 9tofe ift fd)ön, bie Ütofe meiner Scfjmefter ift am fd)önften. gn ben (Stabten finb bie 4orarf;tigften §äufer. gn Sonbott leben bie reitfjften ^aufleute (merchants). 5>ie reid)ften Sente finb nid)t immer bie freigebigsten. 2. ®er $lbler ift ber ftärffte 53ogel. (£r fjat bie längften gliigel unb bie fdjärfften drallen. . gm grilling finb bie £age fürder al§ im Sommer; aber im SBinter finb fie am fiirjeften. 2)a§ Silber ift foftbarer al§ ba§ Tupfer. 2)a3 ©olb ift ba§ toft- barfte ^Retail. Söein ift beffer al§ $3ier. ®ie fpanifdjen SGßeine finb bie beften (SBeine). tiefer TRaler ift nid)t fo berühmt al§ fein 3Sater; aber feine Silber finb ebcnfo (as) fc^ön. Unfer Onfel 106 Lesson 19. (Df) eim) ift eftenfo reid^ af§ unfer better ; a&er er ift nid)t jo gfüd- lid), Der ftefte Kaffee fommt au§ Arabien. 3e früher (sooner), befto fteffer. «Aufgabe. 40. 1. The street is wide; the square is wider, the field is the widest. The apples are sweet ; the pears are sweeter, the cherries are the sweetest. This mountain is high, it is the highest in this country. The rich are not always the happiest. (The) money is good; (the) labour is better; (the) virtue is the best. The stork has a longer ( Acc . m.) neck than the goose. (The) Ostriches have the longest necks. Mrs. Hunter is a more industrious woman than my neighbour. She is the most amiable lady. In spring 2 the 3days iare*) longer than in winter; in summer 2 they iare the longest. The morning was warm, the evening was warmer. The old man is feeble ; the sick woman is feebler; the little child is the feeblest. 2. Miss Lucy is the handsomest [and loveliest] girl in the town. Napoleon I. (ber (Srfte) was the greatest general. (The) lead is useful; (the) copper is more useful; (the) iron is the most useful metal. I have a strict master; my cousin has a stricter; the son of the count has the strictest [of all]. The strength of the strongest man is far less (toeit geringer) than that (bie') of an elephant. The general was more **) unfortu- nate than unskilful. The (3e, § 10) better (the) men are, the happier 2 they iare.*) Augustus was more successful than brave. The more, the better. It is best. We are richest, when (menu) we 3are imost 2 Contented. Alexander was as ambitious (efjrgeijig) as Caesar. I am as tall (grojs) as you, but my bro- ther is not so tall as you. Conversation. 2Beld)er glitfj ift breiter, ber Nectar ober ber Ütfjein? 3ft SBUfjefm ftärfer af§ $arf? ©inb bie reichten Sente immer am gfüdfidjften ? 2Befd)e§ ift ba§ foftftarfte Sttetall? lifter mefdje§ ift am nüjfidjften ? 2Befdje§ finb bie fteften SBeine? SBofjer' fommt ber ftefte Kaffee? 2Beldje§ ift bie fdjönfte Hume? 3ft 9fffreb after al§ @ie? Der 9W)ein ift oief breiter. 3d) benfe (think), $arf ift ftärfer. Da§ ift nid)t immer ber gall (the case). Da§ ©ofb ift ba§ foftftarfte. Da§ @ifen ift am nüjjlidjften. Die fftanifdjen SBeine. Der ftefte Kaffee fommt au§ Arabien. Dfjne 3meifef (no doubt) bie 9tofe. Dfein, er ift jünger af§ id); er ift ber jüngfte ©of)n. *) The figures before the words indicate the order in which the words are to follow in German. • **) See p. 104, Note. Cardinal Numbers. 107 ©inb biefe Slepfef reif? 2öelcfje§ ift ba§ ftärffte 2$ier? 2öeldje§ ift ber größte gifdj? §aben ©ie beffereS Ster? $ft gräufein üiofa ein fd)öne§ 9ftäbd)en? kennen ©ie eine fdjönere Sfume al§ bie D^ofe ? 2BeId)e§ ift ber fältfte DJlonat in £)eutfd)fanb? ©ie finb nid)t gan^ (quite) fo reif af§ bie Sirnen. SDer (He^anf ift ba§ ftärffte. j£)er SBaffftfd) (whale) ift ber größte öon allen §ifd)en. 9?ein, aber id) fjabe beffern 23ein. ©ie ift fef)r fdjön; fie ift biefd)önffe öon ben brei ©djtoeftern. 9Wn, id) fenne feine fdjönere. ®er 9Jlonat Januar ift ber fäftefte. Twentieth Lesson. ON THE NUMEEALS. (3af)ftüörter.) The numerals are of two kinds, namely: Cardinal and Ordinal numbers. I. Cardinal numbers, ©rmti^afjfen. (£in, eine, ein or ein§ one. ^toei two. brei three. bier four. fünf five. fed)§ six. fieben seven. ac^t eight. neun nine. $ef)n ten. elf eleven. jttJÖff twelve. breijefjn thirteen. hieran fourteen. fünfzehn fifteen. fedjjefyn sixteen. ftebenjefpt seventeen. acf^efjn eighteen. neun^efjn nineteen. jman^ig twenty. ein unb jtbanjig twenty one. jtnei unb jtbanjig twenty two. brei unb gman^ig twenty three, bier unb gtoait^ig twenty four, fünf unb ^nanjig twenty five. fed)§ unb jttmnjig twenty six. fieben unb jtnanjig twenty seven. ad)t unb Jtban^ig twenty eight, neun unb jtoanjig twenty nine, breifjig thirty. ein unb breif$ig thirty one, &c. bierjig forty. fünfzig fifty. fed^ig sixty. fiebenjig seventy. ad)tjig eighty. neunzig ninety. f)unbert*) a hundred. fjunbert unb ein§ a hundred and 3tbeif)unbert two hundred, [one. breifjunbert three hundred. bierfjunbert four hundred. fünffjunbert five hundred, &c. taufenb*) a thousand. *) A hundred and a thousand are in German simply fjunbert and taufenb (not ein fjunbert :c.); but the English one hundred, one thousand is rendered by einfjunbert and eintoufenb. 108 Lesson 20. ^meitaufenb two thousand. fjunberttaufenb a hundred jefyntaufenb ten thousand. thousand. fünf^igtaufenb fifty thousand, cine 9Mion' a million. 1800, eintaufenb adjtfmnbert — or adfi^efmfyunbert. 1805, eintaufenb adjtljunbert (unb) fünf — or acfytjeijnffunbert fünf. 1852, eintaufenb ad)tf)unbert gtoei unb fünfzig or adfijefjnbunbert jtoei unb fünfzig. Observations. 1) The first number ein, eine, ein (joined to a noun), but einer, eine, eines or cinS (when without a noun), is declined like the indefinite article, which is in fact the same word. When used as a numeral, more stress is employed. The plural is only employed with the definite article: bie einen the ones or some, in which case it is considered as an adjective. 2) We must here observe that the English practice of putting one or ones after the adjective is not admissible in German. When therefore it occurs in English, it cannot be translated, as: a good one = ein guter ( masc .), or if feminine, eine gute, neuter = ein gutes. Note. The two numbers 3 tr) e i and brei have an inflexion for the genitive and dative case, when used before a substantive with- out the article: 2)te ®teid)t)eit ^tretet ^reieefe the equality of two triangles. 2)a§ SBitnbnifj breier Könige the alliance of three kings. 3) All the numerals up to fjunbert admit the inflection cn for the dative plural, when not immediately followed by a substantive. It is however better, not to inflect them at all. 23on breien of or from three. | mit fünfen with five, unter fttoan^ig among twenty. 4) §unbert and Smufenb, when nouns, are declined, as: N. and A. Jrmnberte hundreds ; bie §unberte the hundreds, (bie) Staufenbe (the) thousands. 5) The hours of the day or night are expressed as follows : What o’clock is it? 2Bie biel Ufj r ift e§? Two o’clock gmei Uf)r. A quarter past two ein Viertel nad) jmei or auf brei Half past two tjalb brei. [( towards three). A quarter to three brei giertet auf brei. At three o’clock um brei Uf)r. Note 1. With minutes we reckon as in English. Ex. : Ten minutes to five gefpt Tftinuten uor (or bi§) 5 Ut)r. Five minutes past two fünf Tftinuten nad) ftfoei. Note 2. In before a year must be translated i m $ fl f) r. Ex. : In 1870 im Sa$r 1870. Numerals. 109 6) A person’s age is expressed as in English. Ex.: How old are yon? 2Bie alt finb ©ie? I am twenty years old id) Bin -fluan^ig $al)re alt. 7) The numeral adverbs are: Einmal once; gmeimal twice; breimal three times &c. 8) By adding crlet to the cardinals, the variative numerals are formed; as: einerlei of one kind; jmeierlei of two kinds; brei&rlei; viererlei; $et)nerlei; ntand)erlei of several kinds; vielerlei of many kinds; allerlei of all kinds. These words admit of no inflexion and precede the noun. feigen ©ie mir ^meierlei Stud), Blaue§ unb fdjmar^eS. Show me two kinds (or sorts) of cloth, blue and black. 9) The multiplicatives are formed by adding the syl- lable fad) (or faltig) to the cardinal numbers; as: einfacf) simple, single breifad) triple, threefold i^meifad) \ twofold tnerfacf) quadruple boBBelt / double $el)nfad) tenfold, &c. 10) Single, meaning separate, is translated einzeln; but in the sense of only, it is einzig. Ex.: Single words einzelne 2Börter. Not a single word fein einjige§ 28ort. 11) Only, when an adjective, is also rendered einzig, as: My only son mein einziger ©ol)n. Words. &ie $reunbfd)aft friendship. ba§ ©d)af, pi. — e, the sheep, eine 3* e 9 e a goat. ba§ ©d)mein, pi. — e, the pig. ber (£inmol)ncr the inhabitant, bie ©d)lad)t the battle, ber fallen the bale. ba§ $al)r the year, bie 20od)e the week, leben to live. ber $einb the enemy, geboren born, ber 3uder sugar, bie Tfteile the mile, bie 9teoolution' the revolution, eine Sjnfel an island. 3§lanb Iceland, bie 23aummolIe cotton, ber Steifenbe the traveller. al§ more than, mal times. mel)r Reading Exercise. 41. 1. $d) I)abe nur (only) einen Gruber, ©ie f)aben nur cine ©d)mefter. S£ie ^reunbfdjaft biefer brei Planner. 9)tein Ofyeim f)atte neun $inber. (£r ^atte brei ©öl)ne unb oier £öd)ter verloren, $ünf ^ßferbe I)aben jman^ig ^iifje; benn (for) jebe§ $ferb f)at öier ^iifte. Unter (among) breif^ig Gepfeilt mar nid)t ein guter (Obs. 2.). (£ine 2Bod)e f>at fieben Stage. (£in Stag l)at üier unb gman^ig ©tunben. 4)iefe§ S£)orf l)at adjtjefptljunbert ^mei unb 110 Lesson 20. gmanjig (£inmof)ner, unb breifyunbert adjt unb breifjig Raufer. 3e^n unb fünf unb trier jig madden fünf unb fünfzig. 82 unb 67 madden 149. 2. Slier mal (times) 8 finb 32. — ©ieben mal 9 finb 63. — 21 mal 32 finb 672. gdj bin geboren (was born) im gafjr 1814, unb' mein jüngfter 33ruber im gal)r 1818. Tftaljomeb lebte im gafjr 622. grn gaf)r(e) 1492 Ijat (£olumbu§ Rmerifa entbecft (discovered). ®ie Reformation in £)eutfd)lanb begann im ga^r 1517. (®ie ©tabt) Sonbon f)at 800 ©tragen, 550 $ircf)en unb jtnei SRillionen (£inmoljner. 2öir f)aben 99 fallen Slaummolle ge= tauft. 2)er ®önig f)at meljr al§ jiuanjig ©dfpffer (Sßaläfte). 3)ie geinbe f)aben mef)r al§ breijjig Kanonen oerloren. Jlttfgafie. 42. 1. My neighbour has three houses; I have only (nur) one. Our cousin has a new house. The peasant has 54 sheep, 18 pigs and 11 goats. He has also 5 horses, 8 cows and one ox. A month has 30 days. February has only 28. A year has 12 months, 52 weeks or 365 days. I am 17 years old; I was (bin) born in the year 1835. My father is 48 years old; he was (ift) born 1822. I have bought 46 pounds {sing.) [of] sugar and 100 pounds [of] coffee. In the year 1848. — 3 times 9 make (madden) 27. Thirty five and 42 make 77. I have lost a hundred florins. Is it three o’clock? No, Sir. it is half past three. 2. The city [of] Strasburg has 5400 houses and more than 60,000 inhabitants. How much is 8 times 15? 8 times 15 is 120. The battle of (bei) Leipsic took place (fanb ftatt) in the year 1813. The French revolution began (begann) in 1789. Iceland lies (liegt) in the North (im Rorben) of Europe, and is 400 miles long and 150 broad. We arrived (finb an- gefommen) in (im) October 1852, and sailed (abgefegelt) in January 1853. The traveller has seen more than thirty two towns and ninety five villages. Show me three kinds [of] paper, blue, green and brown (braun). II. Ordinal numbers. These are formed of the cardinals by adding the termination te from two to nineteen, and ffo to the remainder, beginning with twenty. The first and third however are irregular, making ber erfte, ber britte. They are declined like adjectives. The 1st ber (bie, ba§) erfie. the 5th ber fünfte, the 2nd ber §mei=te. the 6th ber fed)§te. the 3rd ber britte. the 7th ber fiebente. the 4th ber bierte. the 8th ber ad)te. Numerals. Ill the 9th ber neunte, the 10th ber jefjnte. the 11th ber etfte (eilfte). the 12th ber gtüölfte. the 13th ber brei'jetjn'te. the 14th ber bierjetjnte. the 15th ber fünfjetjnte. the 16th ber fed^etjnte k. the 20th ber 5 Umn§ig=fte. the 21st ber ein unb gtoanjigfte. the 22nd ber jtnei u. gttjanjigfte. the 23rd ber brei u. jtoan^igfte the 30th ber breifiigfte. [:c. the 40th ber bier^igfte. the 50th ber fünfeigfte. the 60th ber fecfijigfte. the 70th ber fiebenjigfte or fieB* the 80th ber adjtjigfte. [gigfte. the 90th ber neunjigfte. the 100th ber f)unbertfte. the 101st ber tjunbert unb erfte. the 102nd ber Ijunbert unb jmeite. the 120th ber tyunbert unb 3 tban= jigfte, 2C. the 200th ber jtoei'Ijutt'bertfte. the 30(Tth ber breiljunbertfte, ic. the 1000th ber taufenbfte. the 2000th ber jttjeitaufenbfte. the 10,000th ber ^eljntaufenbfte. the last ber (bie, ba?) le|te. the 1255th ber gtoölfljunbert fünf unb fünfjigfte or ber taufenb ^tueitjunbert fünf unb fünfjigfte. Observations. 1) In compound numbers, the last only can be a ordinal; the others remain cardinals, as: 2) er fjunbert bier unb jtuan^igfte the 124th. 2) The ordinals are declined as adjectives in the three genders ; the form of the declension depends upon their being preceded by an article, or not, as: 2)er gefjnte Tßann the tenth man. Gen. be? jefynten 91tanne? of the tenth man &c. •Jftein britte? ©la? my third glass. 3) The date is expressed as follows: On the tenth of May tttit jefjnten 9ttai or ben lOten 9ftai. What is the day of the month = ber tüiedielte ift fjeute? It is the 8th e? ift ber adjte or tr»ir tjaben ben 8ten. 4) ®er erfte and ber lejjte assume sometimes a comparative form, when referring to two persons or objects: ber, bie, ba? er ft ere the former; ber, bie, ba? letztere the latter. 5) Of the ordinals are formed the distinctives by the addition of the termination cit?. These are in German: (£rften? (or erftlidj) first. bierten? fourthly, &c. gtoeiten? secondly. ^eljnten? tenthly. britten? thirdly. elften? eleventhly, &c. 6) The fractional numbers (with the exception of l)afij half) are also derived from the ordinals, by adding the word SlfyeU, which however is commonly abridged into tel, as: ein 2)ritttf)eit or drittel a third ; ein SSierttjeil or Viertel a quarter ; 112 Lesson 20. ein fünftel ic. ; ein 3^^tel ; ein gmötftel ; brei 9IctyteI 3 /sths ; bier Spunbertet 4 /iooths; fieben Staufenbel 7 /ioooths; &c. 7) §afb half and gan§ all, whole, are adjectives and placed after the article, as: .@in gan^eS Satyr a whole year. (Sin tyatber £ag half a day. (Sine tyatbe Stunbe half an hour. (Sin tyalbeS Sotyr half a year or six months. The half means bie Jpätfte. Note. With tyalb another kind of dimidiative numerals is for- med, as: britttyalb = 2*/2 ; biertljalb = 3 1 /2 ; fünfttyalb = 4*/2 zc. These expressions mean two ivhole ones and of the third the half only &c. Instead of jtoeit’balb, which is not usual, we say anbertf)alb, which signifies one and a half undeclined , Ex. : 3lnbertf)atb Satyte one year and a half, toierityalb ©Hen three yards and a half. We may however say with equal propriety, bier unb eine halbe Me or bier Men unb eine tyalbe. Words. $£)er 53anb the volume. bie gftafctye the bottle, flask. ba§ $atyrtyun'bert the century. bie Piaffe the class. ber $apft the pope. ber §er^og the duke. ber §afe the hare. bielleidffi perhaps. er ftarb he died. ba§ filter the age. ber Sttyee tea. bie Jiegie'rung the reign. bertyei'ra'ttyet married. fleißig industrious, diligent. Reading Exercise. 43. 1. ®er erfte DJfrmat be§ britten $atyre§. £)er jroeite Stag ber bierten SBoitye. ®a§ fettySte -genfter beS bierten StocfS (story). §err Jtobinfon mar 32 SBoityen franf; in ber brei unb breiffigften ftarb er (he died). $afob ber 3meite (James II) ftarb in $ranf= reicty ben (or am on the) bierjetynten September 1701. ©eorg III. (ber Stritte) mürbe (was) ben 22ten September 1761 in ber 2Beft= minfter=$tbtep (Abbey) gefrönt (crowned). (Sr mar bei feiner Sltyrom SBefteigung (accession) 22 !yatyre alt. 2. Submig XIV. (ber ^lierjetynte) ftarb im $atyr 1715 ; Submig XV. im Stotyre 1774; Submig XVI. im ^atyre 1783. SDrei s M)tef finb bie §mtfte bon brei Giertet. SfiefeS ift mein fünftes (SflaS. SDie $rau mar anberttyatb Stotyre franf. §ier ift gmeierlei 28ein, rottyer unb meityer. SBiebict Ütyr (what o’clock) ift e§? (£§ ift fünf Utyr ober bietteidft ein Giertet auf feityS. §einricty ber Slctyte, $onig bon (Sngtanb, mar fectySmal bertyeirattyet. Aufgabe. 44. 1. The first day. The third year. I have the fifth volume. The second week of the seventh month. This is our sixth Lesson 20. 118 bottle. The eighth year of the nineteenth century. The child was a week and a half old. Charles is the twentieth in his class. March is the third, June is the sixth, and December the last month of the year. The duke of (bon) Marlborough won (gemann) the battle of (bei) Hochstädt on the 12th [of] August 1704. He died on the 16th of June 1722. 2. (The) Pope Gregory ((Gregor) VII. was an enemy of the emperor Henry IV. Edward III. took (erorberte) Calais on the 3rd of August 1347. I was five times at (in) Paris and four times at Brussels. We set out (finb abgerei§t) the 26th [of] November 1850, and we arrived (finb angefommen) the 14th of April 1851. Peter (ifkter) the Great died at St. Petersburgh on the 8th February 1725, in the 53rd year of his age and in the 43rd of his reign. Tell me (fagen Sie mir) what o’clock it is. It is four o’clock or half past four. I shall go out at (um) a quarter to five. Conversation. 28ie oiele $inber l)at §err Proton? SBie alt ift fein ättefter Sofjn? SBie alt ift feine jüngfte Softer? 3n meinem $a|rf)unbert leben mir? 28ie me! finb 30 unb 50? SBie ml ift 12 mal 12? Söaren (Sie geftern auf ber $agb (out hunting) ? 28a§ Ifaben Sie gefdjoffen (killed) ? 2öeld)en Sßlajj (place) Ijat ©eorg in ber Sdjule ? Unb fein SBruber Walter? Söann mürbe $arl V. geboren? SBann ftarb ^eter ber ©rofje? Söie alt mar er? Jpaben Sie oielSBein getrunlen? 2Öie oiel Sf)ee münjdjen Sie? 28eldje§ ift bie §älfte oon 6 /s ? Söaren Sie lange in 5lmerifa? Sßie nie! Ulir ift e§? können Sie mir fagen, mieoiel Ulir e§ ift? 3ft e§ ein Viertel auf oier? Um mieoiel Uffr fpeifen Sie? Um mieoiel U^r gelJenSie gu^ßett? (£r f)at 6 $inber: 2 Söljne unb 4 Softer. (£r ift 18 3al)re alt. Sie ift fünf 3af)re alt. Sßir leben im 19ten 3df)rf)unbert. 30 unb 50 finb 80. 12 mal 12 finb 144. 3a, geftern unb f)eute (to-day). 2öir f)aben 13 §afen gefdjoffen. (£r ift feljr fleißig, er f)at immer (always) ben erften $laj). Söalter ift ber 26fte in feiner klaffe. (£r mürbe geboren im 3af)r 1500. 51m (or ben) 8ten Februar 1725. (£r mar 53 3abre alt. £)a§ ift unfere britte fjlafd^e. 3d) münfdje brei Viertel $funb. S)ie §älfte oon 6 /s ift 3 /s ober 6 /i6. 4 3o|re, 2 Monate unb 23 Sage. (£§ ift 11 Ul)r ober fjalb jmölf. 3d) fjabe feine Ul)r ; aber e§ mag f)alb ^mei Ul)r fein? (£§ ift fd)on brei Viertel auf oier. 3d) fpeife (dine) um 12 Uljr. Um 10 Ul)r ober fjalb 11. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 8 114 Twenty first Lesson. The Verb. $ a 3 «SHttoort. General Remarks on Verbs. , § 1. There are five kinds of verbs, viz.: 1) active or transitive; 2) passive; 3) neuter or intransitive; 4) re- flective, and 5) impersonal verbs. 1) A verb is active or transitive, when the action requires an object or person acted upon: $d) effc I eat {what?) einen $4>fel an apple. $d) liebe I love {whom?) meine (Bdjftefter my sister. We see that effen and lieben are active or transitive verbs. The object is commonly in the Accusative , some- times in the Dative. 2) A verb is considered passive, when the action con- veyed by the verb, is suffered by the subject itself: kleine (Sdjmefter to ir b öon mir geliebt. My sister is loved by me. ®ie ^XepfeX tnerben gegeffen the apples are eaten. 3) A verb it termed neuter or intransitive , when it implies a state or an action which does not pass over to an object, but remains with the subject: $d) fdjlafe I sleep (you cannot say: I sleep something). Sd) gef)e I go (not: I go somebody or something). 4) A verb is reflective or reflected, when the object to which the action passes over, is the same person as the subject: 3'd) unterhalte miören to swear (148); erlösen to become extinct (135). with ü: fügen to lie (142); betrügen (betrügen) to cheat (111). § 3. Verbs ending in jen, (fen, d)ten, gnen, ein, etn, igen and iren or ieren, as: teuren to dance; paden to pack up; ad)ten to esteem; regnen to rain; fdjmeidjeln to flatter; beffern to improve; fünbigen to sin; ftubiren or ftubieren to study, &c. Except: fttjen to sit (13); baden to bake (155); erpreßen (tobe frightened (21); festen to fight (137), and fledjten to twist (138). Formation of the tenses. The Present tense is formed by detaching the final n from the Infinitive, as: 3d) lobe I praise or I am prais- ing (from loben to praise); id) fudje (from fudjen to seek). In the Imperfect the syllable te (sometimes ete) is added to the radical, as: lob=te from lob=en; fjör=te from frören; reb=ete from reb=en. The Past participle is formed by prefixing the syl- lable ge and by the addition of t (sometimes et), as: gc= lob=t, ge=l)ör=t , ge=reb=et. All simple and compound verbs (L. 31) take this gc.*) The first future is formed by combining the auxiliary tdj toerbe with the Infinitive: *idj toerbe loben, id) toerbe Ijören, id) toerbe reben. The Perfect and Pluperfect, by combining the aux- iliary idj Ijabe, idj Ijatte :c. with the Past Participle, as: idj fjabe gelobt, id) l)abe gehört, id) f)abe gerebet; Pluperfect id) l)citte gelobt, i$ (bitte gehört ic. This is quite analogous to the conjugation of the English regular verbs. The terminations of the different persons of the Pre- sent and Imperfect tenses are as follows: Present. Singular. Plural. 1. — e 2. —ft or eft 3. — t or et. — eit — t, et or en — eu. Imperfect. Singular. Plural. 1. — te or etc — teu or cteit 2. — teft or eteft — tctoretet(n) 3. — te or etc. — teu or eteu. *) Not those compounded with inseparable particles, where the prefix ge is dropped (see p. 121, 5). Kegular Verbs. 117 Conjugation of a regular or modern verb. Sofien to praise. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present Tense. Sd) lobe*) I praise, I am praising Sd) Tobe bu tobft or lobeft thou praisest er (fxe, e§) lobt he (she, it) praises man lobt people praise mir loben we praise if)r lobt or lobet \ ye praise or ©ie toben / you praise fie toben they praise. I [may] praise bu tobeft thou mayst praise er tobe he may praise tobte I praised bu tobteft thou praisedst er tobte he praised mir tobten we praised lie ‘lobtln }y° u P raised fie tobten they praised. mir toben we may praise if)r tobet \ ye may praise ©ie toben / you may praise fie toben they may praise. Imperfect. Sd) tobte**) (if) I praised bu tobteft thou praised er tobte he praised mir tobten we praised if)t lotet \ nrai „ d Sie loten / you praised fie tobten they praised. Perfect. Set) fjaöe getobt I have praised Sdj f)cibe getobt I may have pr. bu Ijaft getobt thou hast pr. bu tjabeft getobt thou mayst h. pr. er t)at getobt he has praised er fjabe getobt he may have pr. zc. zc. zc. zc. Pluperfect. Set) fjatte getobt I had praised Set) t)ätte getobt (if) I had praised bu tjatteft getobt :c. bu tjatteft gelobt zc. er tjatte getobt zc. er t)ätte getobt :c. First Future. Set) merbe toben I shall praise Sd) merbe toben I shall praise bu merbeft toben thou wilt praise bu mirft toben thou wilt praise er mirb toben he will praise mir merben toben we shall pr. ibr merbet toben \ 4 »erben loten / youwülpr - fie merben toben they will pr. er merbe toben he will praise mir merben toben we shall praise ibr merbet toben \ - nl 4 »erben loben / you wlU P r ' fie merben toben they will praise. Second Future. Sd) merbe getobt tjaben I shall Sdj merbe getobt t)aben I shall have praised have praised bu mirft getobt tjaben :c. bu merbeft getobt fjaben zc. zc. zc. zc. p ) or tob’ in the familiar way. — **) or tötete. 118 Lesson 21. First Conditional. Singular. 3dj mürbe loten I should praise bu mürbeft loben zc. er mürbe loben he would pr. * * Plural. loir mürben loben we should ifjr loürbet loben [praise fie loürben loben zc. In the same manner, conjugated with other auxiliaries of mood : Potential. Sdj fann loben I can praise. 3dj fomtte loben I could praise, idj mufj loben I must praise, id) follte loben I ought to praise, id) mill loben I will praise. id) modle loben I would praise zc. Second Conditional. 3dj mürbe gelobt Ijaben or l)ätte gelobt I should have praised bu loiirbeft gelobt ijaben or f)ätteft gelobt thou wouldst have praised zc. zc. Imperative. Sobe or lob’ praise (thou). loben loir or lajjt un§ loben \ let us er foil loben let him praise. loir looEen loben /praise, fie follen loben let them praise, lobet or loben @ie praise (you). Infinitive. Pres, loben or loben to praise. um ... $u loben (in order) to praise. Past, gelobt Ijaben or gelobt ju Ijaben to have praised. Participles. Pres, lobenb praising. Past, gelobt (gelobet) praised. Note 1. The English mode of conjugating the verb to be with the addition of a Part. pres, cannot be rendered literally in German, but the corresponding tenses must be given, as: Pres. I am learning id) lerne; he is learning er lernt zc. Impf. I was learning idj lernte; he was learning er lernte. Perf. I have been learning i Note 2. Interrogative form: praise? lobte id)? or Ijabe idj .. not praise id) lobe . . . nidjt. I nid)t or id) f)abe nidjt gelobt. Form of inflexion of all lick — IteMc Such are: Sieben to love, like, leben to live, to be alive. Ijoleu to fetch, to go for. fdjidcn to send, banlen (dat.) to thank. l)ctbe gelernt zc. •o I praise? lobe id)? Did I gelobt? — Negative: I do did not praise id) lobte . . . regular verbs: — ge-liebt. laufen to buy. legen to lay, to put. fudjen to seek, madjen to make. lad)en to laugh. Lesson 21. 119 deinen to cry, weep. fragen to ask. fagen (dat.) to say, to tell. fpielen to play. lehren to teach. 1)ören to hear, lernen to learn, ftrafen to punish, ftehen to place upright, geigen (dat.) to show. reifen to travel, leeren to empty, füllen to fill, rutjen to rest, mätjlen to choose, bienen to serve, fragen to complain, motjnen to live, to dwell, brauchen to want, to need. Derzeitigen to defend. Words. ^)er Setjrer the teacher, master, bie Aufgabe the lesson, exercise, ber §af)n the cock. ba§ S)ing, pi. — e, the thing, ber JpanbfdpZ ,pl. — e, the glove, bie ftiidje the kitchen, bie 9?ad)tigafi the nightingale, ber 9Qtetjger the butcher. Dfretnanb nobody. ber 2ärm the noise. ba§ $alb the calf. träge lazy, bauen to build. finben to find. träten to crow. Derbienen to deserve, biefen 9)torgen adv. this morn- [iiig. Reading Exercise. 45. 1. $d) liebe meinen Gruber. S£)u liebft beine Sdjmefter. *£)ie gifdje leben im Staffer. 2öa§ taufen Sie? $)er $önig t)at ein Sdjlof; gebaut. $£)er $nabc lernt. ®er Secret tja* biefen Sdjüler getobt, meit (because) er fet)r fleißig ift. ®er Ifrtabe t)at feine Aufgabe nidjt gelernt. ®er Söater ftraft ben trägen Knaben. $£)ie Gutter fpiette mit bem ®inb. 2)ie tabferen Solbaten merben bie Stabt oerttjeibigen. $d) M c ( see ) fpielenbe $inb. ®ie Gutter mürbe meinen, menu ba§ $inb franf märe. 2. SCßir toben ben fleißigen Stüter. Sie Ratten Zn aud) getobt. Dftemanb mirb bie trägen Sdjüler toben, ©eftern 2 t)örte i icf) fd)öne 3Rufif. $d) tjabe fie nid^t gehört. §aben bie $inber geftern gefpiett? Sie merben morgen fpielen. £örft bu bie 9?ad)= tigatt fingen? §ören Sie ben §a|n träten? 4)er §al)n f>at brei* mat gefräst. 3d) ^abe Zn nur einmal (only once) gehört. Sie= bet eure Eltern. Aufgabe. 45 a. I seek my hat. He fetches water. I thank you (3>f)nen). The child wept. We hear a great noise. We heard the cock crow. At (urn) what o’clock did it (er) crow? It crowed at three o’clock this (Acc.) morning. Children, hear my words. j Do you not hear what (ma§) your master says ? Do you seek your cloak? I seek my gloves. Seek and you will find. The servant sought his knife. Has he sought in the kitchen ? It lies (liegt) in the kitchen. The children will play in the garden. 120 Lesson 21. Peculiarities in the conjugation. 1) There are some verbs, in which the c after the radical consonant is retained throughout every mood, tense and person. Such are all regular verbs ending in b en ft ten, ften, gnen, d)nen or tfjmen as it would offend the ear to let the termination immediately follow the b, t, lit or it, of the radical. For example: Sieben to talk. Present Tense. 8 . rcbe I talk PI. mir reben we talk bu rebeft thou talkest itjr rebet \ ye talk er rebet he talks @ie reben / you talk man rebet people talk fie reben they talk. S. Sd) rebet e I talked bu rebeteft thou talkedst er rebete he talked fie rebete she talked. Imperfect. PI. mir rebeten we talked if)r rebetet \ ye talked ©ie rebeten / you talked fie rebeten they talked. Perfect. f)af>e gerebet I have talked. Pluperfect. tjatte gerebet I had talked. In the same manner are SBaben to bathe, fdjaben to injure, bilben to form, lanben to land, achten to esteem, respect, antmorten to answer, beten to pray, marten to wait, miettjen to hire, to take. Part. past: gebabet, gemartet, gefürchtet, getöbtet conjugated : fürsten to fear, to be afraid. tobten to kill. fdjladjten to kill, slaughter. retten to save, rescue. öffnen to open. begegnen to meet. geidjnen to draw. atf)tnen to breathe. arbeiten to work &c. geartet, gearbeitet, geantmortet, begegnet gerettet zc. 2) Verbs ending in fen, jsen, fdjen or gen retain the e only in the second person of the singular present. $ct) tange I dance 3$) reife I travel bu tang eft thou dancest bu reif eft thou travellest er tangt he dances, &c. er reift he travels, &c. Such are: 2$iinfcf)en to wish, fetten to put, to place. tjaffen to hate. fdjäjjen to value, to esteem. Regular Verbs. 121 3) Verbs ending in ein, such as: tab ein (not tabelen) to blame; I)anbeln to act, drop the e before ( in the first person singular of the Present tense; verbs in ern should not omit the t before t. Present Tense. 3'd) f)anble (not fjanbele) I act bu fjanbelft thou actest er fjanbelt he acts mir Raubein we act if)r Ijanbelt \ ye act ©ie fjanbeln/ you act fie f)anbeln they act. $dj bettmnbere I admire bu bettmnberft thou admirest er bettmnbert he admires mir beftmnb ern we admire ifjr bettmnbert I ye admire ©ie benumb ern / you admire fie benumb ern they admire. Imperfect. $d) Ijanbelte I acted, &c. $d) bettmnberte I admired, &c. Such are: ©egeln to sail. erttuebern to reply, f dptteln to shake. *f fett ern to climb. 4) Verbs of foreign origin ending in iren or ieren, are regularly conjugated; only in the Participle past they do not admit of the prefix ge: ©tubi'ren to study. Perf. id) fiabe ftubirt (not geftubirt). probiren to try. „ id) I)abe probirt. regieren to govern. id) £)abe regiert (not gcregiert). ttnarjd)i'ren to march. marfdjirt (not gemarfdjirt). 5) Verbs having an unaccented prefix before them, do not take the syllable ge in their Part. Past. Such prefixes are: be, emb, en t r er, ber, jer, ge, irtifi, boll, toiber and § inter. Ex.: 53eIof)'nen to reward. Part. past, belohnt (not gebeloljttt). berfaufen to sell. Part. past, berfauft (not geberfauft). gerftören to destroy. Part. past, jerfiört (not gejerftort). bermietfien to let. Part. past, bermieffjet let. (Further particulars on this class of verbs are given in the Less. 30.) fi) The following verbs and those derived from them, though quite regular in their terminations, change in the Imperfect and Part, past the root-vowel into a : Infinitive. Present. Imp. 'Part. past. trennen to burn id) brenne id) brannte gebrannt, kennen to know 1 ) id) fenne = fanntc gefannt. kennen to name, call id) nenne = nannte genannt. 1) French connaitre. 122 Lesson 21. Infinitiv. Present. Imp. Part. past. kennen to run id) renne id) rannte gerannt. Senbeit to send id) fenbe = fanbte 1 ) gefanbt. SBenben to turn id) wenbe = wanbte 2 ) gewanbt. Renten to think id) benfe = baefete •gebaut. Bringen to bring id) bringe = braifete gebrad)t. SBiffen to know 3 ) id) weife = wufete gewufet. Words. SDer Briefträger the postman, ber thrift the Christian. red)t right. unred)t wrong. ber Xob death, bie ©rammatif the grammar, bie $öd)in the cook, f. bie ©igenjd)aft the quality. bie Aufgabe the lesson, prächtig beautiful. ber gteifcfeer the butcher, bie Stunbe the hour. gefeorcfeen to obey. ba§ ®ing {pi. — e) the thing. Reading Exercise. 46. £)er Tftann rebet $u diet. BMr rebe ten über ben $rieg (war), ©eftern feabe id) im gluffe gebabet. B$a§ feaben Sie geantwortet? $dj antwortete üßid)t§. ®ie Sdjüler arbeiteten nidjt biet. 3>d) feanbte redjt. 2)u feanbelft unrest. ®ie S)ame wodte nid^t au§= gefeen; fie fürchtete ben fftegen. §aben Sie ©ngtifd) ftubirt? 9lein, id) feabe bie beutfdje ©rammatif ftubirt. ®a§ Sd)tofe ift ^erftört. Tftein 9?ad)bar feat fein §au§ o er fan ft. 2öa§ wün* fd)en (Sie? $d) fannte ben Btann nufet. äßir fennen bie guten ©igenfdjaften ber Königin. $cfe bewunbere bie frönen Blumen in Syrern ©arten. 2Ber brad)te biefen Brief? i)er Briefträger feat ifen gebrad)t. $cfe wufete nicfet, bafe (that) Sie feier finb.*) Aufgabe. 46 a. 1. The boy works not much. I answered: Yes, but he answered: No. We have waited an hour. We feared the rain. The woman talks too much. Do you admire this beautiful tree? I admire a fine picture. People (man) 2 al- ways l admire {admires ahvays ) new things. You know the good qualities of that lady. I fear the dog. I feared the cat. A' good Christian does not fear (the) death. I have not worked 1) In poetry Imp. fenbete. Part, past gefenbet. 2) SBenben (to turn) admits of both forms: Imp. id) wenbete and id) wanbte; Part, gewenbet and gewanbt. 3) French savoir. The present tense of wiffen is conjugated as follows: id) Weife, bu Weifet, er Weife; Plur. wir wiffen, Sic wiffen, fie wiffen. *) See the foot-note 1) p. 101. Lesson 21. 123 much. I have studied my lesson. Did *) you think (have you thought) of me (an mid))? Fear nothing, I shall defend you. 2. Did you think*) of (an, acc.) your poor mother? I shall always think of her (an fie). The president has not esteemed his friends. He does not love them (fie). The but- cher kills 2 an sox i to-day; yesterday 2 he l killed two calves. I liked the little girl, but she did not like me (mid)). Men (bie flftenfdjen) should love one another (etnanber). What did*) the cook (f.) buy ? She bought butter and eggs. My nephew has bought two horses. The children have killed a mouse. He saved his life (Seben, neuter). Conversation. 2öer lernt? 2Bo leben bie gifdje? SBarum ad)ten Sie biefe gran? 2öa? fürchtet ba? Tftabdjen? Söarum ftraft ber 33ater feinen Sotjn? 2Ber tjat bie (Stabt oerttyeibigt? 2Öer liegt ba? 2ßen (whom) tobt ber Setfrer? $ann er and) bie trägen toben? 2öa? öerbienen fie? 2Öen fott man heben? 2öem fotten bie ^inber gefmrdjen ? §at ber §)af)n gefragt? (Setjen Sie in’? Concert'? 2öa? f)at ba? 9Räbd)en getauft? 2öa? oerfauft biefe grau? 2öa? lef)rt biefer 2ef)rer? §at ber 9Jtejjger einen 0d)fen gefdjladjtet ? §aben Sie bie 91ad)tigatt gehört ? £)er $nabe lernt. Sie leben im SB aff er. $d) ad)te it)re guten (Sigenfd)aften. Sie fürstet ben liegen. (Sr fj at feine Aufgabe niäjt ge= ternt. ®ie tapfern (brave) Sotbaten. (Sin fd)tafenbe? $inb. (Sr tobt bie fleißigen Sdjiiler. Sträge Sd)iiter oerbienen (deserve) fein Sob (praise).- Sie oerbienen Strafe. Me guten 99?enfd)en. gf)ren (Sttern unb Setjrern. ga, er f)at jtoeimat gefräst. 9tein, id) getje in’? 2d)eater. Sie Jjat 53rob unb $ä? getauft. Sie oerfauft hinten, 2tej>fel, Pflaumen (plums) unb Dttiffe. (Sr lefjrt gran^öfifdj unb (Snglifd). 92ein, er T^at §mei Kälber ge= fd)tad)tet. ga, fie fingt f)errlid) (beautifully). Reading -lesson. 51cfob. Aesop. Slefof) reif’te einmat in eine fteiue Stabt. Untermeg? 1 be = gegnete (he) er einem Üteifenben, metier (who) if>n grüfite 2 , unb fragte: „2Bie tang mu£ id) getjen, bi? (till or before) id) jene Stabt erreid)e (reach), bie mir oon meitem 3 fetjen?" „(Set)’ ", (Go on) antm ortete Stefof). 1) on the way. 2) grüben to bow, to greet. 3) afar. *) The English Imperfect tense is mostly rendered by the Ger- man Perfect tense, as : I bought it id) t) a b e e§ getauft; especially in a question did you think? fjnben Sie . . get>ad)t? 124 Lesson 22. ,,$d) me ift mot)t," ermieberte (replied) ber fReifenbe, „baft (that) id) gefjen muft, um 4 bort 5 anpfommen 4 ; aber id) bitte 6 bic^, mir $u fa gen, in mieöiet geit id) bort anfommen merbe." „©eff," miebertjotte 7 5tefop. $d) fef)e (see), bad)te ber grembe, ber $erl 8 ift ein Shirr 9 , id) merbe iftn nid)t meftr 10 fragen, unb ging fort (went on). 9cad) einer SJtinute rief (cried) ätefop; §e ein 2Bort! in jmei ©tunben mir ft bn anfommen." $£)er fReifenbe manbte 11 fid) um unb fragte ifjn: ,,2Bie meiftt bu e§ je|t (now), unb marnm 12 fjaft bn mir e§ nid^t oor= fter 13 gefagt?" — Stefop ermieberte: „ SGßie fonnte id) e§ 4)ir (you) fagen, bebor id) beinen ©ang (Stritt) 14 gefefjen f)atte?" 4) (in order) to arrive. 5) there. 6) I heg or pray thee. — 7) repeated, said again. 8) this fellow. 9) a fool, mad. 10) no more. 11) fid) imt'menben to turn röund. 12) why. 13) before. — 14) gait, pace. Twenty second Lesson. Passive Yoice. The passive Yoice, both for the regular and irre- gular active verbs, is formed by means of the third aux- iliary UiCVbcit with the Past part, of a transitive verb: © e I i e b t merbentobe loved. ©etabett m e r b e n to be blamed. Conjugation of a passive verb. @eto6t iBcrbeu to be praised. Indicative Mooch Present. 3>d) merbe . . gelobt I am bu mirft gelobt thou art er mtrb gelobt he is mir merben getobt we are (Sie merben getobt \ iftr merbet getobt /^ on are fie merben getobt they are CD P- Imperfect. 3'dj mürbe . . getobt I was bu murbeft getobt thou wast er mürbe getobt he was mir mürben getobt we were ihr murbet getobt! 4 mürben gelDbt/y°' 1 were fie mürben getobt they were CD Perfect. $d) but . . getobt morbett I have been praised or I was praised bu b i ft getobt morben thou hast been praised er ift getobt morben he has been praised Passive Voice. 125 nur finb gelobt morben we have been praised l.&SÄ)-'» — *» p““ fie finb gelobt morben they have been praised. Pluperfect . 3d) mar .. getobt morben I had been praised bu marft getobt loorben thou hadst been praised er mar getobt loorben he had been praised 2C. 2C. First Future. 3d) merbe . . getobt merben I shall be praised bu mirft getobt merben thou wilt be praised er mirb getobt merben he will be praised mir merben getobt merben we shall be praised ibr merbet gelobt merben \ . ni , • 4 werben gelofit werben }y ou Wl11 be P ra,sed fie merben getobt merben they will be praised. Second Future. 3d) merbe getobt morben fein I shall have been praised bu mirft getobt morben fein thou wilt have been praised 2C. 2C. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. £)aj3 id) getobt merbe I (may) be praised „ bu getobt merbeft thou (mayst) be praised er getobt merbe he (may) be praised 2C. 2C. Imperfect. $d) mürbe getobt (if) I were praised bu mürbeft getobt thou were praised er mürbe getobt he were praised 2C. 2C. Perfect. 3d) fei getobt morben I may have been praised bu feieft getobt morben thou mayst have been praised er fei getobt morben he may have been praised 2C. 2C. Pluperfect. Sßenn ic^ getobt morben märe if I had been praised menn bu getobt morben märeft if thou hadst been praised menn er getobt morben märe if he had been praised 2C. 2C. 126 Lesson 22. First Conditional. $d) toürbe gelobt werben I should be praised bu tüürbeft getobt Serben thou wouldst be praised er toürbe gelobt trerbert he would be praised 20. 2C. Second Conditional. Sfd) würbe gelobt worben fein I l, , ,, , , • , or id) wäre gelobt worben I 1 shoula üave been pralsed bu tüürbeft getobt toorben fein thou wouldst have been praised er toürbe gelobt toorben fein he would have been praised 2C. 2C. Sing, toerbe getobt.*) Imperative. Plur. toerbet getobt be praised. Infinitive. Pres, getobt to er ben or getobt ^u werben to be praised um getobt werben in order to be praised. Past, getobt Worben fein or $u fein to have been praised. Participle. Pres. $u tobenb to be praised.**) Past, getobt Worben. Such are: geftraft werben to be punished, gefjafjt werben to be hated, getabett Werben to be blamed, geadjtet Werben to be respected, betofmt Werben to be rewarded, üerborben Werben to be spoiled.. £>er Arbeiter the workman ber ^einb the enemy, ber §of the court, bie 0 |nacf)e the language, bie §itje the heat, artig good, unartig naughty, etjrtid) honest. Weit because. t)öftid) polite, fd)ted)t bad. gegeben given. Words. nod) einmal once more, again, betrogen (. P.p .) cheated, deceived. Oerbeffert corrected, improved, gefyrodjen (P. p.) spoken, gerufen (P. p.) called, wotjlfeit or bittig cheap, geflößten ( P.p .) stolen, oon by. wenn if. wieber again. Sebermann everybody. bejahten to pay. Reading Exercise. 47. 1. $d) werbe oon meinem Setter getobt. 2)u wirft nidjt oon itpn getobt, benn (for) bu bift nid)t fteijjig. $>er un= *) This Imperative is hardly ever used. When a xmssive Im- perative is required, it is commonly formed with fet. Ex.: Set getobt or gepriefen, o (Sott! be praised o God! **) The Latin laudandus, a, urn. This participle stands before its noun as an adjective, and is declinable, as: An action to be praised eine 5 U 1 0 b e n b e ^anblungT Passive Voice. 127 artige $nabe mirb ntd^t uon feiner Butter getobt merben. ®ie unartigen Knaben tu erben uon ifjren Ottern ge ft raft mer = ben. Tftarte tuirb immer uon ifjrem 9J?ufiftetjrer getabeIt A tueit fie nadjtäffig ift. Reifte Soufine tuirb uon Seb ermann ge= liebt, tueit fie immer artig unb fmftid) ift. ®ie Wiener, metdje fleißig finb, tuerben belohnt tuerben, unb btejenigen, tuetc^e träge finb, tuerben getabett merben. 2)ie Stabt tour be uon ben gein= ben gerftört. $£)te Aufgaben tuurben uon bem Setjrer uer = beffert. £)er arme 9ftann mürbe uon bem gremben betrogen. 2. $art ift geftraft to or ben, tueit er unartig mar. $5te Ufiren tonnten nict)t uertauft merben, meit fie (too) fd^ted)t maren. ®ie TRäbdjen, metdje tfjre Aufgaben gemalt (done) Ratten, finb belohnt m or ben. feie Arbeiter finb gut be^at)tt morben, meit fie uiet gearbeitet fiaben. 33on mem ift biefe Aufgabe oer- beffert morben? Sie (it) ift noch nidjt uerbeffert morben, meit ber £et)rer feine 3 e h tjatte. ©etobt merben ift beffer al§ ge = tab eit merben. tiefer arme $nabe mufj belohnt merben, meit er fo efirticf) ift. ®iefe ^Briefe müffen nocf) einmal abgefdjrieben (copied) merben, meit fie fo fdjtedjt gefcfjrieben (badly written) finb. Aufgabe. 48. 1. I am loved by my brother. This father loves his children, and he is loved by them (non ifjnen). Mr. Bell is respected by all who (tuetdje) 2 know lhim. The French language is spoken in (an) all [the] courts of Europe. This ring was given me by my good grand-father. By whom teas this letter written? I was called out of my room. Fre- derick has been punished by his teacher. Have the young plants been spoiled by the great heat? The roads have been spoiled by the heavy (ftarfen) rain. 2. This boy will be punished again, if he does not do 3(mact)t) lhis 2 exercise. He was punished also yesterday. This house would not be sold, were it (marc e§) not so cheap. I am expected at five o’clock; my sisters are not expected till (not till = erft urn) seven o’clock. A false (fatfdj) man is feared by everybody. This letter must be sent to the post- office (auf bie $oft). My watch has been stolen. To be loved is better than to be hated. Observations on the Passive Voice. § 1. The circumstance, that in English only one auxiliary is used both for denoting the passive voice and the past tense of neuter verbs renders the comprehension and employment of the German passive voice difficult for an Englishman ; for nothing in his own language in- forms him, when in a past participle construed with the 128 Lesson 22. auxiliary to be, a treatment suffered by the person repre- sented by the subject of the sentence, is indicated. The pupil therefore must always carefully distinguish, ivhether the past participle construed with to be belongs to an active*) or to a neuter verb (see p. 114, 1 & 8). In the first case to be must he translated with the German auxiliary to e r= bert f in the second with the auxiliary fein. For example: This hook is much read biefe§ 23ud) tnirb öiel gelefen. The hook is arrived ba§ 23ud) ift angefommen. A. When to be is translated toetfoctt. § 2. Whenever an agent is mentioned, with a past participle and the verb to be, it is considered to be the passive voice, and the verb to be is rendered Uietben. Ex. : Present. loerbe bon meinem Slater geliebt. I am loved by my father. Impf. ®iefe§ (Sdjlofs umrbe oon bem §er§og erbaut. This castle was built by the duke. Perf. 2)ie (Stabt ift oon ben $einben oerbrannt iuorben. The town has been {was) burnt by the enemies. § 8. When the agent is not mentioned, but only understood, to be must again be rendered by ft) erben. Ex. : Pres. ®ie gifdje to erben mit 9Ze|en gefangen. (The) fish are caught with nets (viz. by fishermen). Impf. 2)iefe§ @d)lof$ tour be im Same tüirb (eben) angefleibet, ba§ £au§ tour be eben (or ge = rabe just) gebaut. Second Example. — The glass is broken: To express this in the active voice, the tense. must be changed ; it would ten be: Somebody has broken the glass. Thus is broken has here the meaning of : has been broken , but not of is breaking or is being broken. When therefore the present tense is or are is synonymous with has been or have been , it must be rendered ift or finb, and not *) In French: Ale. fut banni d’Athenes , OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 9 130 Lesson 22. tt>irb or to e r b e n. The above sentence must therefore be translated: ba§ ®la§ ift jerbrodjen. Third Example. — The gates of the town are shut , means, they have been shut and are now closed (in Latin: clausce sunt), and must be translated: 3)ie £f)ore ber ©tabt finb gefdjloffen. Whereas : »The gates are shut every day at eight o’clock« must, according to § 3 be translated: ®ie Xf)ore m erben jeben £ag um ad)t Uf)r gefd)loffen (clauduntur). (People are in the habit of shutting them every day at 8 o’clock.) § 5. In a similar manner, the Imperfect was must be translate^ ID a r instead of tour be, when it has the meaning of hadfbeen. Ex. : The glass was broken, before I came into the room. £)a§ ®la§ mar ^erbrochen, ehe id) in’§ dimmer fam. (In French: Le verre etait casse.) The gates were shut (= I found them shut). 2)ie Shore maren gefdjloffen. Examples of adjective -participles. I am inclined or disposed ich bin geneigt. I am convinced it is true id) bin überzeugt, bafj e§ maf)r iff. We were astonished mir maren erftaunt. The bottles were emptied bie glafdjen maren geleert (— leer). The castle is destroyed ba§ n ge- liebt? Sft er aud) belohnt morben? SBeldje ©olbaten merben gelobt? SBann mürbe bie ©d)lad)t bei SBaterloo geliefert (fought)? 28er murbe befiegt (defeated)? 28ann mirb biefe§ §au§ ber- fauft merben? SBiebiel murbe bafiir be^aplt? SBirb ber ©arten ba$u (with it) gegeben merben? Swollen ©ie biefen 9?ad)mittag einen ©pajiergang mit un§ mad)en? $öon mem ift $artl)ago jerftört morben? Sfiarum ift biefer 9flann geftraft morben? $8on mem ift ©afar ermorbet morben? S3on mem ift bie 23erfd)mörung ©atilina’§ entbecft morben? Sft biefe§ §au§ fdjon alt? 28ar §einrid) IV. bon granf* reid) ein guter $önig? Söie ftarb er? ©r mirb bon feinen Sehern ge= liebt, meil er fleißig ift. ©r Ijjat einen $rei§ befommen (got). £)ie tapferen. löten Suni 1815. ®ie granjofen mürben befiegt. ©3 murbe fdjon geftern berfauft (or ift ... morben). 3epntaufenb bierpunbert ©ulben. 9tein, biefer (it) mirb befonberä (separately) berfauft merben. Sd) mürbe mit Spnen gepen, menn id) nidjt sum^fiittageffen (dinner) bei iperrn g. eingelaben märe. $on bem römifdjen ©onful ©cipio 9lfricanu§. ©r pat eine golbene Upr geftoplen (stolen). $on 33rutu§ unb ©affiu§, unb einigen anbern. S3on bem rötnifd)en ©onful ©icero. ©5 murbe im Sapre 1741 erbaut. ^a, er mar ber befte $önig unb murbe bon feinen Untertanen (subjects) mie ein $ater geliebt. ©r murbe bon Jtabaillac ermorbet. *) See the foot-note **) p. 74. **) See the foot-note **) p. 126. 133 Twenty third Lesson. ON THE PKONOTJNS. German pronouns are divided into* six classes, viz.: 1) personal, 2) interrogative, 3) demonstrative, 4) posses- sive, 5) relative and correlative, 6) indefinite pronouns. 1. Personal pronouns. (Sßetfönlidje $ürn>örter.) § 1. These are: id) I; bu thou; er he; fie she; e» it; mir we; if)r (€>ie) you; fie they. They are declined as follows: 1st personal: id) I. Sing. N.'xti) I Plur. mir we G. meiner*) of me unferer (unfer) of us D . mir to me, me un§ to us, us A. mid) me. un§ us. 2nd personal: bu thou. Sing. N. bu thou G. beiner*) of thee D. bir to thee, thee A. bid) thee. Plur. if)r (ye) or (Sie you euerer (S^rer) of you end) ($tjnen) to you, you end) (Sie) you. 3rd masc. N. er he G. feiner*) of him D. i'fjm to him, him A. if)n him, it. personal: er, fic, eg. fem. fie she ifjrer of her if)r to her, her fie her, it. neuter. e§**) it (feiner) of it (ifym) to it e§ it. Plural for all three genders. N. fie they G. ifyrer of them D. if)nen (fid^) to them, them A. fie them. 4) Reflective form: fidj. P>- Wich / himself, herself, itself. \ For all genders. Ac. f M yourself, yourselves, themselves. / Sing, and Plur. *) These genitives : meiner, beiner, feiner ic. are borrowed from mein, bein, fein and in poetry abridged into mein, bein :c., as: Re- member me gebenfe mein. **) e§ is sometimes contracted with the preceding word, as: tjaft bu% gieb mir% id) f)ab’§ ic. (For the gen . and dat. see § 5 & 7.) 134 Lesson 23. Examples. 1) With the dative. (£r giebt mir, — bir, — ißm, — ifjr. He gives me, — thee, — him, — her. ($r berjeityt un§, — Sßnen, — Ujnen. He pardons us, — you, — them. 2) With the accusative. ©ie fennen mid), — b i df; , — ifjn, — fie. They know me, — thee, — him, — her. (£r liebt un§, — ©ie, — fie. He loves us, — you, — them. 3) With the reflective form. (£r fleibet fid) he dresses (himself), fie befleißigen fid) they apply themselves. § 2. The English form of addressing a person in conversation is you , your; in German however there are two modes of address, bu and ©ie. The first implying a certain degree of familiarity, founded upon affection and friendship, is used by relations and intimate friends. Teachers also address their young pupils, and employers their young servants with bu. In quarrels and oppro- brious language, SDu is also heard. On the contrary the polite mode of address is ©ie, which is, properly speaking, the third person plural, but is distinguished from the same by a capital initial, as: SBemt ©ie modert (instead of menu ißr mollet) if you like. §aben ©ie gefeiert? (for ßabt ißr gefeiert) have you seen? In conversational style, the Imperative of the verb must always be followed by the pronoun ©ie. Come fommen ©ie (instead of fommet). Give me geben ©ie mir, instead of gebet mir. Tell him fagen ©ie ißm (not faget or fagen ißm). NB. The possessive pronouns must always be in conformity with the personal pronouns; thus bu corresponds with bein; ißr (ye) with euer, and ©ie (you) with as: £> a fi beiu 53ud)? §abt ißr eure 93üd)er? §aben ©ie $8üdjer? § 3. In the following expressions the construction of the two languages is different. It is I idj bin e§. it is we mir fiitb e§. it is he (she) er (fie) ift e§. it is you ©ie fiub e§. It was I id) mar e§. it was you ©ie maren e§ :c. Personal Pronouns. 135 Interrogative. Is it I bin idj e§? is it we finb tnir e§? is it he ift er e§? is it you ftnfc <©te eg? Words. $£)er gleijs industry. fragen to ask. braunen to want, bie ^adjridjt the news. ad)ten to esteem, bergen ( Bat .)*) to pardon. leiden (Bai.)*) to lend, benfen (an) to think (of). fd)icfen (Bat.) to send, feiten seldom. id) fdjreibe I write. Eeading Exercise. 51. $d) liebe bidf) unb bn liebft midfj. (Sie (fie) lieben un§ unb mir lieben fie. $d) fenne fie nidjt. i^d) berjeilje 3fönen. ^dj ber= $ei$e if)tn ni(f)t. fe lobte un§. Sie lobten ifjn toegen (on ac- count of) feinet gleifjeg. $d) merbe morgen einen 33rief an il)n fd)reiben. $d) benfe an (of) bid), — an Sie, — an fie. Sie benfen immer an un§. 2Bir }gred)en fefjr feiten bon if)nen. merbe fie $f)nen nid^t geben. (£r mirb e§ un§ fagen. (£r erinnert fid) meiner (he remembers me), ©eben Sic if)tn biefe§ 23ud). Jtufgabe. 51 a. I ask you. I see him. We know her. She knows me. He esteems us. They want it. You know them. They esteem her. Will you give me (Bat.) the letter ? Answer me (Bat.). She will not pardon*) him (Bat.). Does he love them? I write a letter to (an acc .) her. Pray (bitte), lend me your penknife. He will lend it [to] you. She does not send it to him. Tell her (Bat.) that news. You must buy me (Bat.) another stick. He remembers (erinnert fid)) me (Gen.). Our friends do not think of (an) us. Who is there? It (e§) is my father. Is it you? Yes, it is I. It is he. It was she. Tell him and her, that (bafj) I 2 love ithem. I will go with you. He goes with us, but not with them. § 4. In German, inanimate objects and abstract ideas being either masculine, or feminine, or neuter, the personal pronouns of the third person in the singular, er, fie, eg, must be used accordingly whereas in Eng- lish it serves for all inanimate objects. For example in the following sentence: Where is my hat? It is in your room , it cannot be translated with eg, but with er, be- cause the subject it refers to, viz. : ber §ut, is a masculine noun, as: *) For verbs which govern the dative, see the 48th lesson, n. 136 Lesson 28. 1) Nominative Where is my hat? 2ßo ift mein §ut (m.)1 Where is my pen? So ift meine geber? Where is my hook? So ift mein 53ud) (n.)? case: it = cr, fie, e8. It is in your room, ift in Syrern 3immer. It lies on the table, fte liegt auf bem Sifdj. It is there. @8 ift ba. 2) Accusative case: it = iljn, fte, c8. Have you my hat? Yes, I have it. §aben ©ie meinen §ut? 3a, id) fjabe Uju (viz.) ben §ut. Do you see that flower? I do not see it. ©eljen ©ie biefe 23lume? 3d) felje fic nid^t. Will you buy the house? Yes, I will buy it. Sollen ©ie ba§ §au§ taufen? 3a, idj mill e8 taufen. In the plural it does not change, as there is only one form for all three genders, viz. acc. fie; dat. it) nett: I will see them id) mill fie fefyen. I give them bread id) gebe it)nen 53rob. § 5. The pronoun e § , when it expresses a thing , is only used in the nominative and accusative cases. In the genitive it is replaced by beffert or be^felben (see § 8); the dative does not occur without a preposition (see § 7). Examples : (£§ ift gan$ neu it is quite new. 3d) l)abe e§ (Acc.) getauft I have bought it. 3d) meif; e§ (Acc.) I know it. (£r bebarf beffen or beffelben he requires it. § 6. They must be translated e§, when joined with the auxiliary to he and followed by a noun taken in a definite sense. For example in answer to the question: Who are they mer firtb fie? we say: They are my brothers (sisters) &c. (£§ finb meine trüber (©djroeftern) jc. § 7. The pronoun of the third person etc., either singular or plural, is hardly ever used with a preposition preceding, when it represents an inanimate object or an idea. Commonly the adverb ba, which coalesces with the preposition , is used instead, both for the dative and accusative, corresponding with the English words there- with, thereof, therein, thereupon &c., as: Personal Pronouns. 137 2)amit with it or with them, barin in it or in them, baburd) through it or them, bar on of or from it or them, bar auf upon it or them. barau§ from it or them. baju to it or to them. barnn} at1t or at them - bar üb er about or over it, them, bar unter among them, bafür for it or them. Examples. 2Bir finb bam it (Dot.) juf rieben we are contented with it. ÜEßie Diele finb barin (Bat.) how many are in it (therein)? 2Bir merben bar üb er fpredjen we will talk about it. Note. A similar contraction takes place with the adverb flier with prepositions, as: permit herewith or with this; fjierin in this ; ^iertion of this; hierauf, f)ierau§, hierbei, hierüber k. § 8. The pronoun of the third person, er, fie, e§, in all its cases, is sometimes replaced by berfelbe, bie- fetbe, ba^felbe (lit. the same). This is chieffy the case when a misunderstanding might happen, or to avoid em- ploying together two words of similar sound, as : il)m tf;n or if)n il)nen. Ex. : $d) fiabe biefet ben nid)t ermatten. I have not received them. 0oh id) itjm ben @tod geben? am I to give him the stick? $a, geben 0ie it)m benfelben (instead of ifjn if)m). Yes, give it to him. § 9. The English words myself , himself yourself &c. are termed reflective personal pronouns , when they re- present the same person as the subject or the nominative. They can only be in the accusative and sometimes in the dative. In the accusative they are rendered by mid), bid), fid) 2C.; in the dative by mir, bir, fid) ic. Ex.: I wash myself id) tt>afd)e mid). He distinguishes himself er jeidjnet fid) au§. (For further particulars see the 34th lesson on the Reflective verbs). § 10. If the accusative or dative denotes any other person than the subject, it has no longer a reflective character, and is translated if)n felbft, mir felbft ic. : I have seen him (himself) ( Acc .) id) I)abe if)U felbft gefeijen. He gave it to me (myself) (Bat.) er gab e§ mir felbft. § 11. The indefinite pronouns myself \ himself, your- self &c. preceded by a substantive or another personal 138 Lesson 23. pronoun in the Nominative case, are rendered only by the word felbft*) ‘without a second pronoun (see the 25th lesson), and must not be confounded with the re- flective personal pronouns. Ex. : I come myself id) fomme felbft (French moi-meme). The man himself ber 9ftann felbft. You say so yourself ©ie fagen e§ felbft. We have seen it ourselves mir haben e§ felbft gefeiert. Note. Sometimes both forms occur together, as: lobe mid) (§9) felbft I praise myself. ßiebe beinen 9löd)ften nhe bid) felbft love thy neighbour as thyself. Words. ®ie ©rammatif the grammar, ber Xl)ee tea. genommen taken, ber 9tegenfd)irm the umbrella. bo§ ©ebot the command, mafdjen to wash. empfehlen to recommend. Reading Exercise. 52. 2Bo ift mein SBleiftift? §ier ift er. §aben ©ie meine geber genommen? $d) babe fie nicht genommen. $ft biefer £pee gut? $a, er ift fel)r gut; ich fann $l)nen benfelben empfehlen. ©inb $b re Rüther in Sfgmt dimmer? 3a, fie finb bar in. SBoIlen ©ie biefe§ 58ud) lefen? $d) toil! e§ Spnen leiden, $d) §abe e§ mir getauft, ©r ift felbft gefommen. $d) bin e§. $ft fie e§? $a, fie ift e§. $art ber Igmölfte fleibete (dressed) fid) felbft [an]. <2)er $nabe hat fid) nidjt gemafd)en. $d) bac^te nid)t baran. 2Bir finb bamit jufrieben. $E)er ©raf hat e§ felbft gefagt. $d) toei^ nic^t§ bat) on. Aufgabe. 52 a. Where is my grammar? It is not here, I have not seen it. Who has taken the apple of the child? I have not taken it. Have you seen my pencil? I have not seen it. Have you lost your stick yourself? No, my son has lost it. I will go myself (§ 11). This wine is very good, I can recommend it (§ 8) to you. Will she bring it to you? Yes, she will bring it to me to-morrow. Jesus has given (gegeben) us the command: »Love thy neighbour as thyself« (§ 11. Note), but many people do not mind it (achten nid)t barauf). Do you know anything (miffen ©ie ©tma§) of it? We speak of it. They know nothing about it. Depend (3äl)lett ©ie) upon it. Conversation. kennen ©ie mich? Sfa, ich fenne ©ie- kennen ©ie auch meinen Später? Dfoin, ich fenne ib n nid)t. *) ©elt> ft, placed before a noun, answers to the English even : Selb ft bie £f)tere even the animals. Selbft ber $onig fann e§ nicht tl)un even the king cannot do it. Interrogative pronouns. 139 SBei ift ba? gft fie e§ tütrfltd^ (really)? SBollen ©ie ben SBrief fdfjretBen? $amt id) e§ f elbft t^un (do)? $)enfft bu oft an (of) mid)? §aben ©ie meinen 9legenfd)irm gefel)en? TOt mem geljen ©ie in’§ £l)eater? <55el)t fonft gemanb (anybody else) mit gl)nen? Sßollen ©ie fo gut (kind) fein, mir biefe§ 23ud) leiden? SBarum tonnen ©ie e§ mir nidfjt teilen? 2Ber mirb un§ begleiten (ac- company)? kennen ©ie jenen gremben mit bem grauen §ut? (£§ ift meine ©dfjmefter. ga, fie ift e§ mirflid). 9tön, mein ©otm mirb iljn fd)reiben. 5^ein, ©ie tonnen e§ nid)t felbft tl)un, id) muf 3 gtjnen Reifen (help), gd) bente immer an bid). Üßein, id) Ijabe Ü)n nid()t gefetjen. gd) merbe mit gljnen geljen. kleine 9?id()ten (nieces) (£mma unb Suife geljen and) mit mir. (£§ tl)ut mir leib (I am sorry), id) tarnt e§ gf)nen nid)t leiden. SBeil id) e§ ber gräulein ©rün öerfprod)en (promised) I)abe. Unfer greunb 51. mirb un§ be= gleiten. gd) fenne il)n nidfjt; id) f)abe il)n nie (never) gefe^en? Twenty fourth Lesson. 2. Interrogative pronouns. (gragenbe giirmörter.) These are: 1) 2Ber who? what? Declension. N. mer who? Cr. meffen whose? D. mem to whom? A. men whom? ma§ what? meffen of what? ma§ to what? ma§ what? SOS er? applies to persons without distinction of sex; tt)a§? to inanimate objects. Ex.: 2B e r ift ba ? who is there ? ÜEßer l)at biefe§ getljan? who has done this? üöeffen Jput ift ba§? whose hat is this? 2Bem geben ©ie biefen 9ting to whom do you give this ring? Sßen |at er gefragt? whom has he asked? 2Ö a § braud)en ©ie ? what do you want ? 2öa§ fud)t er? what is he looking for? 93on ma§ f)aben ©ie gefprod^en ? of what have you spoken? Note. When such direct questions are placed in dependence on a preceding verb, they become »indirect questions«. Then the verb comes last, as: 140 Lesson 24 Stiffen ©ie, toer biefeS gejagt ^at ? do you know who said this? ©agen ©ie mir, toa§ ©ie gefefjen Mafien tell me what you saw. Setgen ©ie mir, toa§ ©ie gelefen l)aben. Show me what you have read. 2) 20el(fyer, toeldje? tt)eld)e§? ivhich (of)? and für einer, e, §? what? the latter used without a sub- stantive : 2Ö e X cf) e r bon $f)ren Söhnen ? which of your sons ? 20eld)e§ bon biefen 93üd)ern f)a6en ©ie gelefen? Which of these books have you read? §ier finb jtoei jRafiermeffer; meldjeS tooHen ©ie fjaben? Here are two razors: which will you have? ©ie fiaben einen ©tod berloren? 2&a§ für einen? You have lost a stick? What sort of a stick was it? NB. What before a noun is not a pronoun, but an inter- rogative adjective , and already explained p. 69 & 70. 3. Demonstrative pronouns. (^imreifenbe Qfirtoörter.) 1) The demonstrative pronouns are : masc. liefer jener berjenige ber berfelbe ber nctmlid)e (ebenberfelbe ber cmbere fem. biefe jene biejenige bie biefelbe bie namlidje ebenbiefelbe bie anbere neuter. biefe§ this one. jene§ that (that one). ba§jenige \ that (of), the one. b a § / (French : celui, celle.) betreibe baS nfimli^t / the same ' ebenbö§felbe the very same.) ba§ anbere the other. masc. N. ber'jenige 6r. bemjenigen D. bemjenigen A. benjenigen N. ber*) G. beffen D. bem A. ben 2) Declension of berjenige. Singular. fem. neuter. b i ejenige b a mjenige that berjenigen bemjenigen of th. berjenigen bemjenigen to th. biejenige bamjenige that 3) Abridged form, bie bam that beren beffen of that ber bem to that bie bam that Plural. for all genders. biejenigen those berjenigen of th. benjenigen to th. biejenigen those. b i e those b er erf) of those benen to those b i e those. *) To distinguish this demonstrative pronoun from the definite article, more stress must be laid upon it. t) Sometimes also beren. Ex. $dt) fjctbe beren 3 toei (two of them). Possessive pronouns. 141 Examples. 9Jtatt ©toe! uttb berjenige (or ber) meine§ $8ruber§. My stick and that of my brother {or and my brother’s). (Er fjat fein ©etb unb ba§jenige (or ba§) fehte§ §reunbe§ fcerloren. He has lost his (own) money and that of his friend {or his and his friend’s money). Observations. 1) When the demonstrative pronoun this or that is not immediately followed by its subject, but is separated from it by the verb to be, as for instance: » this is my hat«, it takes in German the neuter form of the singular, biefe§ with no regard to the gender or number of the noun. This little sentence must therefore be translated: biefeÖ ift mein §ut, although §ut is of the masculine gender (see also p. 69, Note 1)*). It is the same in the interrogative form: 3ft biefe§ 3f)r §ut? — Instead of biefe§ we often abbreviate, and say bie§ or ba§ or e§. Ex.: This {or that) is my dog biefe§ (not btef e r) ift mein §unb. This is my daughter b i e f e § or b a § ift meine Softer. Are these your brothers? finb bie§ (ba§) 3djre $8riiber? These are his gloves ba§ (bie§) finb feine §anbfcf)uf)e. 2) The same rule applies to the interrogative which or what? meldje^ before fein, to be, both in singular and plural, as: Which is your pen? metd)e§ ift $f)re Seber? Which are your pens? meldjes? finb Sfyre gebern? What is her name? mehf)e§ ift 3f)r 9tame. 4. Possessive pronouns. (33efitj=an3eigenbe ftürtoörter.) 1) These are formed of the possessive adjectives , mein, bein, fein, unfer, euer, 3t)r, ifjr, by adding the termination ige. With this form, the definite article always precedes. They are: masc. fern. neuter. ber m einige bie m einige ba§ meinige mine, ber beinige bie beinige ba§ beinige thine, ber feinige bie feinige ba§ feinige his. ber Ujrige bie irrige ba§ irrige hers, ber, bie, ba§ unfrige; pi. bie unfrig en ours, ber, bie, ba§ 3f)rige or eurige; pi. bie 3f)rigen yours, ber, bie, ba§ irrige; pi. bie irrigen theirs. ') But when this means this one , it agrees. Ex. bief e r ift 142 Lesson 24. They are declined like adjectives with the definite article ( N . ber meintge , G. beS meinigen, D. bem meinigen :c.) and appear sometimes in the abridged form: ber meine, ber beine* ber feine, ber tyre, ber unfere, ber euere or ber ber tyre, which however is not to be recommended. 2) There is another form unaccompanied by the article, viz.: masc. Singular. fem. neuter. Plural. for all genders. meiner meine mein e 3 meine mine. beiner beine beineS beine thine. feiner feine feines feine his. tyrer tyre il^reS tyre hers. unferer unfere unfereS unfere ours. 3f)ter £tyre 3f)reS 3f)re \ yours. euerer euere eueres (eures) euere / tyrer tyre tyreS tyre theirs. This latter form is commonly used in conversation and declined like biefer, biefe, biefeS. Declension. Singular. masc. fern. neuter. N. meiner meine meines G. meines meiner meines D. meinem meiner meinem A. meinen meine meines. Plural. N. & A. meine, G. meiner, D. meinen. Examples. 3ft bag 3f)r ©tod? jftein, eS ift nityt ber meinige (or meiner)* eS ift ber 3f)rige (or eS ift Stirer). Is that your stick? No, it is not mine, it is yours. 2Beffen ^ferb ift baS? $S ift baS meinige or meinet. Whose horse is that? It is mine. SBeffen 23iid)er finb baS? (£S finb bie unfrigen or eS finb unfere.. Whose books are these? They are ours. Words. 2)ie (Sefunbtyeit the health. ber SBudtydnbter the bookseller. ber ©eift the mind. baS Stud) the cloth. bie 23rieftafcf)e the pocket-book, bie ®inte the ink. tabetn to blame. arbeiten to work, redjt right. flopfen to knock. gefdjrieben written. baS ^äcfdjen the parcel. nehmen to take. Relative pronouns. 143 Reading* Exercise. 53. SB er gefjt ba? ©5 ift ein englifdjer Offizier'. SBeffen U(>r iff biefeS? ©§ ift bie tneine§ greuttbeg Slrtfjur. 9Rit mem münftfjen €?ie gu fpredjen? $dj münfcfye mit Syrern Slater 31 t fpre= djen. 2 BeId)e§ ift $l)r §ut, biefer ober jener ? liefer ift e§. $ 8 on meinem §aufe fpreefyen er SDfatnn, to e l djer or ber ... , bie gr au, toeldje or bie ... , bag 33ud), toehfyeg or bag . . . ; bie Shiver, toeldfe or bie . . . It is peculiar to them to place the verb at the end of the sentence (or clause). Ex, : £)a§ ©elb, toeldfeg ic^ in ber ©traj 3 e gefunben Ijabe. Observations. 1) In English the relative pronouns whom, which, that, though understood, are sometimes left out after the noun ; in German they must always be added, as: The boy I saw with you yesterday (instead of whom I saw). £)er $nabe, ben or to eleven id) geftern bei 3$jnen f a §- Here are the books you have ordered. §ier finb bie Söüdjer, toeldje or bie ©ie befteHt Ijaben. 2) The genitive beffen, beren, beffen always precedes the word by which it is governed, like whose in English: A tree the branches of which are cut off, &c. (£in 23aum, beffen 5(efie abge^auen finb. 3) In the employment either of toeldjer, toeldje, toeldjeg or ber, bie, bag, no difference is made between persons, animals or things. The only difference lies in euphony; the former has the advantage of emphasis, as it consists of two syllables ; the latter that of brevity, and is to be regarded as an occa- sional substitute only. Ex. : §ier ift ber SBein, ben (or toeldjen) ©ie befteHt fjaben. Here is the wine you have ordered. £>er Sftann, to eld) er (or ber) mir bag 93ud) brachte, bag (or toeldjeg) er gefunben fjatte. The man who brought me the book (that) he had found. Note . j£)er, bie, bag is always used after the personal pro- nouns, especially when these pronouns, for the sake of emphasis, are repeated after the relative, as: : ) not in case. Relative pronouns. 145 ber (not weld)er) fo biel für ifjn tf)at. I, who did so much for him. 2Bir, bie wir je^t jung finb we, who are now young. 4) The German relative pronoun w e f d) e r or ber connected with nid)t answers to the English conjunction but after a negative sentence, as: @3 giebt feinen 9Jlenfd)en, ber nid)t feine genfer I)at. There is no man but has his faults. 5) When the relative pronouns are preceded by preposi- tions, they are often contracted with the latter, so that the pronoun takes the form of too ' or toot* (before a vowel) and the preposition follows it, answering to the English ivhereof, whereby, wherefore &c. The 3Boj$u to which or to what. Woburd) by which or what. Womit with which or what. Wobei at which or what. Wofür for which or what. Wooon of which or what. verb goes last. Such are: 2Borau§ from which or what. Worin in which or what. Worüber at (over) which or what. .Worauf upon which or what. Woran at which or what, worunter among which, m p 1 e s. §ier ift ber ©d)lüffel, womit 1 id) bie Stpre geöffnet f)abe. Here is the key with which I have opened the door. SDie ©fäfer, woraus 2 wir getrunfen l)aben, finb $erbrod)en. The glasses, out of which we drank, are broken. £)a§ gimmer, worin 3 id) fdjfafe, ift fef)r fait. The room in which I sleep, is very cold. NB. As shewn in the foregoing examples, the relative pronoun, even in its contracted form, requires the verb always at the end of the clause or sentence. 6) These contractions may be also used interrogatively, as : 2öomit (or mit waS) f)aben ©ie bie Xpre geöffnet? With what have you opened the door? SBooon ft)red)cn ©ie? of what are you speaking? Note 1. The real signification of these contracted words depends on the meaning of the preposition governed by a verb, as : What do you think of, must be translated: woran benfen ©ie? because the German verb benfen requires the preposition a n. Note 2. Persons cannot be alluded to in this manner, as: Of whom are you speaking, must be rendered : S3 on wem fbred)en ©ie ? not 20ob on tyredjen ©ie? Words. $)ie ®rammatif the grammar, ber ©d)uf)mad)er the shoemaker. ba§ ©ebid)t the poem. Dftemanb nobody. 1) or mit wefdjem. 2) or au§ weldjen. 3) or in wefd)em. OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. IQ 146 Lesson 24. geigen reg. v. to show. bie Aufgabe the exercise, öerbeffern reg. v. to correct. genommen taken, gelteren lent {Part. past). Iejjte§ 3dfjr last year. Reading* Exercise. 55. §ier ift ber $nabe, melier fein 93ud) Oerloren f)at. da ift ba§ $8ud), meld)e§ (or ba§) er nerloren f)at. kennen ©ie bie §erren, meldfje (or bie) geftern bei mir maren? 3a, id) fenne fie. 3ft biefe§ bie dame, meldje 3f)tten einen 9tegenfd)irm geliehen fjat? Dfain, fie ift e§ nicfyt. der ©dfjüler, meinem ©ie 3b re ©rammatif geliehen fjaben, ift fef)r fleißig. 2Beld)e§ bon biefen @ebidf)ten fjaben ©ie gelernt? 3d() fjabe biefe§ gelernt. 3d) tonn nid^t mit ber geber fdfyreiben, bie ©ie mir gefcfjnitten fjaben (made for me). Sonnen ©ie mir fagen, mer meinen ©tod genommen ^at ? 3d() meifs e§ nidjt; id) Ijabe Dftemanb gefefjen, ber einen ©tod genom= men fjat. Aufgabe. 55 a. Here is the shoemaker who 3 brings l your 2 shoes. I have seen the garden which {acc.) you have sold. Is this the exercise which you have written? The rooms (which) my father has taken (gemietet), are not large enough. The pen which you have made (gefdjnitten) is not good. The pupil whose exercise you are correcting, is very lazy. My neigh- bour whose horse you (have) bought last year, has gone (ift . . gegangen) to America. Do you know the man who has done (getfjan) this ? I wish to buy the book . . you showed me {Bat.) yesterday. The pictures you have sent me, are very beautiful. The traveller to whom {Bat.) I have lent a florin, is your friend. The book . . I want, is not to be had (jn fjaben) here. Correlative pronouns. 1) The demonstrative pronouns bet jenige ic. f when taken in connection with a relative one, are termed correlative pronouns. They are : Masculine. derjenige, metier; or ber, mefdjer; or berjenige, ber = he who. Feminine. diejenige, meldje; or bie, mefd)e; or biejenige, bie = she who. Neuter. d a 3 jenige, meldje§ ; or b a§, mefd)e§ ; or ba§ jenige, ba§ = that which. Plural for all three genders. diejenigen, mefdje; or bie, mefdje; \ they who, those who. or biejenigen, bie / they which or acc. them which. In the same manner are used: Correlative pronouns. 147 Masculine . deffelbe or cbenberfelbe, toeldjer (or ber) the same who or which. Feminine. diefelbe or ebenbiefelbe, toeldje (or bie) the same who or which. Neuter. daSfelbe or ebenbaSfelbe, toeldjeS (or ba§) the same which. Plural for all three genders. diefelben or ebenbiefelben, toeldje (or bie) the same who or which. Further : @014)0, toeldje such as ; Examples. derjenige, toeldjer (not toer) tugenbf)aft ift, toirb gliidlid) fein. He who is virtuous, will be happy, diejenigen, toeldje tugenbfjaft leben, finb u>eife. They who live virtuously, are wise. diejenigen or @o!d)e (viz. dljiere), toeldje im Winter fdjlafen. Such (animals) as sleep in the winter-time. 2) Both or either may be declined according to the verb they depend on: 3d) gebe e§ bemjenigen, toeldjen id) am meiften liebe. I give it to him whom I love most. 3d) fenne benjenigen nidjt, ben (toeldjen) (Acc.) @ie meinen. I do not know him whow you mean. 3d) fenne biejenige (f.) nidjt, bie (Nom.) ben SBricf braute. 3) The neuter expression referring to a preceding noun is in German baSjenige, toeld)eS that which. Ex.: dasjenige (viz.) 33ud), toeldjeS id) eben lefe. That which I am reading now. 4) That which in an absolute sense is ba§, toaS. Ex.: da§, toa§ fdjön iff, ift nid)t immer gut. That which is tine is not always good. 5) The correlative derjenige, toeldjer is sometimes contracted into SB er, and daS, to a* into SB a 3. Both require the verb at the end of the clause, as: SB er tugendhaft lebt, ift glüdlid). He who lives virtuously, is happy. 3Ba§ fdjön ift, ift nidjt immer gut. What is fine, is not always good. 6) When toer and toaS are used in a general sense; they answer also to the English whoever , ivhatever. Ex. : 10 * 148 Lesson 24. SB er $u bid bebenft, mirb mentg leiften. (@ quiet’s m. Sett.) Who(ever) considers too much, will perform little. SBa§ geredet ift, berbient Soft. Whatever is just, deserves praise. 7) SBet and ma§ are sometimes rendered more em- phatic by adding the words immer, audf) or au$ nur, audj immer, as: SBer (audf)) immer or mer audf) nur = (geber, ber), whoever. 2Ba§ aud) (immer) or ma§ aud) (nur) = Me§ ma§, whatever. SB er and) immer biefe§ gejagt f)at whoever has said this. 2Ba§ (Sie aud) gefe^en f)aben (mögen). Whatever you may have seen. Words. SDie $Pf(id)t the duty bie SBaf)rf)eit the truth. ba§ §eer the army. ba§ Vertrauen the confidence. ber SBet^en the wheat. ba§ $orn, ber loggen the rye. unmiffenb ignorant. nad)läffig careless. erfüllen to fulfil, maijr true. e^rli d), red)tf djaffen honest, berbienen to deserve, fluten to curse, fegnen to bless. Raffen to hate. ba§ (Bla§ the glass. biefen SJZorgen adv . this morning. gebacfen baked. treuer dear, füllen to feel. Reading Exercise. 56. ©erjenige, meldjer reid) ift, ift nidfjt immer jufrieben. ©ie= jenigen, meldje unjufrteben finb, finb nidfjt glücflid). SB er feine Sßftidjt erfüllt, ift ein redjtfdjaffener 9ttann. Siebet euere getnbe; fegnet bie, bie eud) ftudjen, tf)ut (do) ®ute§ benen, bie eudj Raffen. (£r fagte mir, ma§ er mufjte. Spier finb einige gebern, meldje moüen (Sie fyaben? gd) mill bie nehmen, meldje am prtften ift. ©er $önig, beffen §eer gefdfjlagen mürbe (defeated), ift geflogen (fled), ©ie Eltern, beren $inöer geftraft mürben, finb nadjläfftg. SBorüber beftagen Sie fid) (complain)? «Aufgabe. 56 a. He who 3 will mot 2 learn will remain ignorant. What is true to-day, must also be true to-morrow ! They who do not speak the truth, deserve no confidence. I will give this book to him who is the most industrious. The little girl with whom Mary played yesterday, died (ftarb) this morning. The boy who found (fanb) the gold watch, is honest. The man whose name was written in my pocket-book, is arrived. Here is the glass out of which the king has drunk (getrunfen). Who is the happiest man? He who is the most contented. The bread on which (moöon) we live, is baked of (au§) wheat and rye. Lesson 24. Conversation. 2 Ber fjat immer genug? 2 Ben fjaben ©ie getabeXt ? 2 Ba§ münfdjt ber 9ftenfd) am meiften? SOßer fXopft (knocks) an bie £pre? 3Ba§ merben ©ie tfjun? SBeffen ©djreibbud) ift biefe§? 9ln men fd^retben ©ie biefen SSrief ? 3 ft $f)r ©of)n älter al§ meiner ? SÜßie aXt ift er? £)ier ift ein §ut, ift e§ ber 3 t)rige (or 3 f)*er)? ©inb ba§ 3 t)re §anbfd)uf)e? 33on (on) ma§ leben bie ©djafe? 2 Jtit ma§ (momit) tyaft bu ben Knaben gefc^lagen (beaten)? 3 ft biefer ©arten ju oerfaufen (to be sold)? 2Ba§ fagte 3()nen ber S3ebiente? SÜßeXcf^e 9ttenfd)en finb bie un= glüdlidjften? SCßo ift ba§ ©Ia§, au§ meinem (morau§) id} getrunfen f)abe? 2 Bar e§ nidjt meinet? der jufriebene SCRenfd^. 9tteine träge ©cf)üXerin. da§ ma§ er f)offt (hopes). (£§ ift ber ©cf>neiber, melier 3 tjten neuen Etod bringt. 3 d) meijs nid)t, ma§ id) tfjun foil. (S3 ift ba§ 3()te3 ©djüler§. 3 d() fd^reibe if)n an meinen Sefjrer. 9tein, ber meinige ift jünger. (Sr ift 11 3al)re a lt. ■ftein, ba§ ift nid)t ber meinige; meiner ift ganj neu. 3 a, ba3 finb meine. 33 on ©ra§ unb §eu (hay). 3 d() tyabe itjn mit meinem ©tode gefdjlagen. diefer nidjt, aber ber meinet 9}ad)bar§. (Sr fagte mir, ma§ er gehört fjatte. diejenigen, meldje mit SXIIem un- jufrieben finb. 3 d) f)abe e§ in ben ©djranf (cup- board) gefteEt (put). 91ein, e§ mar ba3 be§ £)errn ©rün. Reading -lesson. (Sin tljeuw unb ein mo^tfeiXer. (A dear head and a cheap one.) Unter ber Etegie'rung 1 be§ letzten $önig3 Don Stolen b r a dX ) 2 eine (Smfiörung 3 gegen il)n au3 2 . (Sitter Don ben (Sntpörern 4 , ein polnifdjer ©raf, fetjte einen oon 20,000 ©ulben auf ben flopf be§ $önig§, unb fjatte fogar' (even) bie fJredX^eit 5 ) e3 bent $önig felbft 311 f dC) r eiben, urn 6 iX;n ju erf direct en. SXber ber $önig fdjrieb 7 it)m ganj faltblütig 8 bie folgenbe 3lntmort : ,, 3 f)ren SBrief Ijabe id) richtig 9 erhalten 10 unb gelefen. (S3 j)at mir oiel Vergnügen gemadjt (given), ju feX)en, bafj mein $opf 3 $nen fo üiel mertl ) 11 ift; iE) oerfidjere 12 ©ie, für ben 3 ljrigen mürbe id) feinen §eEer 13 geben." 1) the reign. 2) broke out, from au§brea§ or 91He§ ba§, nm§... all (that)... 4) The indefinite pronoun some, when referring to a pre- ceding substantive, may be translated in different ways. When it replaces a singular, we may say in German accor- ding to the gender: meldjen, toeld)e or meld)e§; in the plural: meld)e, einige or baöon. Frequently however it is not ex- pressed at all. Ex. : Will you have some beer? Yes, give me some. SBoHen rung experience, ber 9Sote the messenger, ber $ßrei§ the prize. id() bin fdjulbig I owe. Dor'fid)tig cautious. (teilen to put (upright). gelehrt learned, aclj. gefproc^en spoken, erhalten (part.) received, tobten to kill, bie 2BeIt the world, beneiben to envy, tljun to do. Oerleumben to calumniate, anmenben to employ. gefd)lagen beaten, f)ö(Iid) polite. Reading Exercise. 57. 9ttan ift gliicflid), menu man jufrieben ift. Tftan glaubt e§ nidjt, menn man e§ nier maljre ©Thrift beneibct ba§ ©lüd 9tiemanbe§; er oerleumbet Üliemanb. klopft $etnanb? 3'd^ Ijöre $emanbe§ Stimme, $d) tljue nie ©tma§ gegen mein ©emiffen. 53eneibe nid)t ba§ ©liid 9Inberer. ^eber (or ein $eber) t)at (eine (feeler. fütandjer tauft unb bejaljlt nid)t. DRefjrere I)aben ben nämlichen geiler gemadjt. SSiele oon meinen greunben (inb ge(torben (died), llttfer ffreunb fpridjt oon Merit. Seiner ift oljne §ef)Ier. Seiner oon un§ I)at ben $ßrei§ getoonnen (won). Aufgabe. 58. 1. One is unhappy, when one 2 is i discontented. These young people love each other. (The) animals eat (freffen) one another. Be polite to (gegen) everybody. Has the man killed anybody? No, nobody. One should not speak much of (Oon) one’s self. I have seen nobody. Is there (giebt e§) anything prettier (neut.)? I have spoken of nobody. Have you received anything ? No, Sir, I have not received anything. Ho (tljun Sie) nothing against your conscience. Every one who knows the world , is cautious. Have you many friends ? I have only a few. 2. Put these books each in (an) its place. The one goes, the other comes. Some are too (ju) young, the others are too old. Both are dead. Many a man drinks more than 154 Lesson 26. he wants (bebarf). I know several of (bon) them. No one has helped me (mir geholfen). Do not speak evil (23öfe§) of others. Tell me all (II, Obs. 8) yon know (ma§ Sie miffen). I have sold all. One must not kill one’s self. The messenger said the same ( neut .). With money 2 one lean do 6much good (p. 99, § 8) 3 [to] 4 one’s 5 fellow- creatures (^ebenmenfdfen). Conversation. 28ann ift man reid)? Sft Semanb ba? 28a§ fagte $fyr greunb? (Siebt e§ etma§ ©d)önere§ al§ ber geftirnte (starry) Jpimmel? §aben ©ie biele (Spüler? ©egen men fod man ßöflid) fein? 2Ba§ tl)un biefe Seute? Sieben bie trüber einanber? 28er ift otjne $el)ler? 28er mid (wishes) glüdlid) fein? kennen ©ie §errn 23raun ober §errn ©rün? 28o!)in' foil id) bie 23üd)er fteden ? 28er f)at ba§ ©elb bejaliit? ©oll man bon 2lnberen 23öfe§ (evil) reben? 21on ma§ f|)red)en ©ie? 28iebiele §üte fjaben ©ie? ©inb $f)re §üte fd)marä ober gran (grey)? 21on mem haben ©ie biefen 23rief erhalten? 28enn man gufrieben ift. 2cein, e§ ift Dftemanb ba. (£r fagte 91id)t§. $d) fenue nid)t§ ©d)önere3. 3d) habe mehrere. ©egen 3ebermann. Einige lefen , 2htbere fd)reiben. 3a, fie lieben einanber. deiner (Dhemanb). Sebermann mid e§ (so) fein. 3d) fenne 23eibe. ©ie meinen 2hibe in meinem §aufe. ©teden ©ie jebe§ an feinen Sßlatj. (Einige bon unferen $reunben. Tdan fod bon 91iemanb (or bon •ftiemanben) 23öfe§ reben. 28ir fpredjen bon 2(dem. 3d) l)abe jmei: einen alten unb einen neuen. 3d) l)abe einen fd)marjen unb einen grauen. 2)on Semanb, ben ©ie nicht fennen. Twenty sixth Lesson. IRREGULAR VERBS. (Unregelmäßige 3eittoörter.) (Ancient or strong conjugation.) Those verbs are commonly called irregular (urtregel= mäfjig) which deviate from the formation and conjugation of the modern or regular verbs. They are indeed suffi- ciently regular after their own fashion of conjugation. However as the term irregular has hitherto been adopted, we cannot help using it too. They amount to 163. The deviation from the modern form takes place only in the Irregular verbs. 155 Imperfect and the Fast participle; all the other tenses are formed in the same manner. 1) The terminations of the Present tense of the ir- regular verbs are the same as of the regular verbs, but several change besides in the second and third persons singular and in the Imperative mood, their radical vowel a into a, and e into i or tc, as: fdjlage, bit ftfylfitjft ; — id) gebe, er giebt (gibt). — (Sieb. 2) The peculiar character of the Imperfect Indicative of the irregular verbs consists in their adding no termina- tion at all to the root, but in changing its vowel in the Imperfect , as from geben, Imp. id) gab. The difference of the vowel causes them to be divided into four con- jugations, according to the prevailing four vowels a, i, 0 and it. Those ancient verbs with the vowel a in the Imperfect, compose the first conjugation geben — id) gab), those with i or ie the second (f^retben — id) fdjrieb), those which take o the third ()d)ief 5 en — id) f d) 0 |j) , and those which take U the fourth (fragen — id) fcfyfltg). — The 3rd pers. sing, of the Imperf. is always like the first. 3) The Imperfect of the Subjunctive mood is formed by adding e to the Imperfect Indicative, and modifying the vowel, when it is tt, 0 or u, as: 3d) gäbe, bu gab eft, er gäbe :c. (roenn id) gäbe). 4) The participle past of all verbs of the ancient form ends in CU instead of t, as: gegeben given; gefd)tie= ben written , &c. ; but as the vowel does not always remain the same in the participle past, the two first conjugations have three subdivisions or classes, accord- ing to the prevailing vowel of the Participle past. Remarks. Strictly speaking, only verbs having a, e, ei and i for their root-vowel can be ancient or irregular verbs. By ano- maly or bad orthography, however, a few verbs with ä, 0, ö, au and it have also crept in. To facilitate somewhat the study of these verbs, we think it useful to give the following general hints , before we enter upon the particulars. 1) Ancient verbs having tt in their root, retain this vowel in the Part. past. The Imperfect takes either tc or u , as : 156 Lesson 26. blafen to blow. Imp. blie§. Part. geblafen. tragen to carry. Imp. tfttg. Part, getragen. 2) Those having e in their root, receive in the Imperfect either a or o ; when 0 , the Imperfect and Participle have the same vowel, as: geben to give; gab — gegeben festen to fight; fodjt — geformten. 3) Ancient verbs having ct in their root, change it into i or it, both in the Imperfect and Part, past, as: beiden to bite; btfj — gebiffen bleiben to remain; blieb — geblieben. 4) Ancient verbs having ie in their root, change it into 0, both in the Imperfect and Part, past,*) as: f(f)Iiefjen to lock; fdjlojs — gefdjloffen. 5) Ancient verbs the root of which is ittb, ing or inf have in the Imperfect a and in the Part. past tt, as: finben to find; fanb — gefnnben fingen to sing; fang — gefangen. Conjugation of an irregular or ancient verb. ©«Jen to give. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. gebe I (may) give bu gebeft thou mayst give er gebe he may give tt)ir geben we may give lie' Sm } you may give fie geben they may give. Imperative. $cf) pbc **) I might give bu gäbeft thou mightst give er gäbe he might give nur gäben we might give lie Sen } ^ mi 8 ht § ive fie gäben they might give. gebe I give bu giebft thou givest er gtebt he gives roir geben we give if)r gebt l ©ie geien / y ou § lve fie geben they give. gab I gave bu gabft thou gavest er gab he gave roir gaben we gave iljr gabt ©ie gaben you gave fie gaben they gave. *) With the only exception of Hegen to lie (see Nr. 12, p. 159). **) Used especially after toenn if. Irregular verbs. 157 Compound Tenses. Perfect. fjabe gegeben I have given bu fjaft gegeben thou hast given er f)at gegeben he has given ic. ic. Pluperfect. §atte gegeben I had given bn fjatteft gegeben thou hadst given :c. :c. First Future. $d) merbe geben I shall give bu to i r ft geben thou wilt give er mirb geben he will give mir merben geben we shall give ibr merbet geben \ . in . Sie werben geben / y° u wlU § lve fie merben geben they will give. Second Future. U)erbe gegeben tjaben I shall have given bu to i r ft gegeben tjaben thou wilt have given K. It. First Conditional. mürbe geben I should or would give bu mürbeft geben thou wouldst give er mürbe geben he would give mir mürben geben we should or would give 2C. 1C. Second Conditional. mürbe gegeben fyaben I should have given bu mürbeft gegeben t>aben thou wouldst have given 2C. 2C. Imperative Mood. (5$icb give (thou). (er foil geben let him give.) geben mir or lafd un§ geben let us give. gebet or geben @ie give (you). fie f often geben let them give. Infinitive Mood. Pres, geben or §u geben to give. Past, gegeben f)aben or gegeben $n f>aben to have given. Participles. Pres, gebenb giving. Past, gegeben given. 158 Lesson 26. We subjoin now all the irregular verbs according to their respective conjugations and classes, numbered in succession from 1 to 163, and followed by an alpha- betical list. First Conjugation. Imperfect with a. First class: Past Part, with e. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. e 1. ©eben to give. gieb or gib id) gab, bu gegeben gebet or gabft, er gab, given, geben ©ie totr gaben :c. give. Subj. id) gäbe. Conjugate in the same manner : a u 3'geben *) (sep. v.) to spend (money) ; Vergeben ( insep . v.) to forgive {Part. p. Vergeben , not Dergegeben) ; juriid'g eben to return, to give back, &c. 2. dffen to eat. $d) gebe, bu gicbft, er gtebt or gibt, loir geben, if)r gebet (©te geben), fie geben. $d) effe, bu iff eft, er it, — effet, if$t, h)ir effen, if)r effet, effen ©ie. fie (©ie) effen. Steffen to eat (of animals), to devour. id) at I ate. PI. mir aten. Subj. id) äte. geoeffen eaten. 3. $d) freffe, bu friffeft, er fritt, wir freffen :c. freffet. id) f r at- Subj. id) fräte. gefreffen eaten. 4. Steffen to measure. $d) meffe, bu miff eft, er mitt, mir meffen :c. mit, meffet, id) mat- meffen ©ie. Subj. id) mate. Thus is conjugated: ab'meffen to measure, to survey. 5. Sefen to read. gemeffen measured.. $d) lefe, bu liefeft, er Ite§ t, mir tefen :c. Iie§, lefet, lefen ©ie. id) I a 5. Subj. idj täfc. Thus: bor'lefen to read to some one. 6. ©eljen to see, to look. $d) fete, bu fictjft, er fic^t, mir fetjen :c. fiet, fetet, fet)en ©ie. ien the cake, ber ©lord) the stork, ber Dtoman' the novel, ber $ome't (2d decl.) the comet. bie ©efal)r the danger. ber ©ulben the florin. ba§ Ufer the shore, bank. fdjttmd) weak, feeble. bie 9ttau§ the mouse. ber geinb the enemy. leife low. balb soon. nod) nid)t (nie', not yet (never). nod) feine not yet any. ber Corner the Roman. Reading Exercise. 59. 1. ©eben Sie mir eine gute geber. 9ttein greunb gab mir einige Skater. §aben Sie il)m biefelben jurii Abgegeben? 91od) nidjt. 2Ba§ ifjt jener $nabe ba? ©r ifjt $irfd)en. 3dj l)abe nod) feine gegeffen. ®er Tflann af$ (too) oiel. £)er 0d)fe frifjt ©ra§ unb f>eu. ®ie ^ferbe tjaben alien £>afer gefreffen. Söarurn meffen Sie biefe§ £udj? 3d() mill e§ oerfaufen. SBarum lie§t ber Sdjiiler fo leife? ©r l)at eine fdjmad)e Stimme (voice). 5Sorige§ (last) Serf)* la§ er tauter. SDer Sßlinbe fiel)t 9?id)t§. Siel), l)ier finb beine SBiidJer. §aben Sie ben Stord) gefe^en? 2Bir fal)en il)n nidjt. 3abe. 3dj fjatte ba§ 2Bort oergeffen. ®er Gebiente ift an ber 5tprc geftanben; gmei anbere Männer ftanben bei iljm. ®er arme 9)tann. bat mid), it)m ju Reifen (help); er f)at aud) anbere Seute gebeten. 0er 9tabe fa§ auf einem l)ol)en 33aum; id) meifi nidjt, mie lange er bort (there) fafj. 2Bo tag ber Gipfel? ©r lag im ©rafe. JittfgaBe. 60 . 1. Give me two florins. When (mann) will you 3return 2 them [to] ime? In a few days (Pat.). The countess gave the poor man (Pat.) a shilling. God (©ott) has 4given ( 2 the) Irregular verbs. 161 treason to 1 mankind. I eat bread and cheese. Thou eatest bread and butter. The children ate cherries. I saw you seat l grapes (Strauben); were they ripe? Eat of (bon) this cake, it*) is for you. The oxen eat (3) grass and hay. The caterpillars ate (3) all [the] leaves of (bon) that tree. The cat has eaten the mouse. I gave her (Dot.) a flower. What does Miss Eliza read? She reads a novel by (bon) Sir Walter Scott. Have you read Lord Byron’s poems (($ebid)te) ? I have not yet read them, but I shall read them soon. 2. Have you ever (je) seen a comet? Yes, I saw a beautiful comet. The young man does not see the danger in which he is [placed]. Young lady, read only good books. Beneath (unter) the sun ( Dot .) 2 nothing 1 happens without the will (Stiffen, m.) of God. What has (iff) happened? An old man stood on the (am) shore and cried (meinte). Close to him (neben il)m) sat two little children, and a dog lay beside (neben, Dot.) them. The poor man begged me, to give him a few florins. Fabricius possessed (13) such (jo) great vir- tues, that (baft) even (felbft) the enemies of the Romans 2 respected lhim. Second class: Partielle with 0. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. 0 16. Skfeljten (Bat.) x ) to order, to command. 3d) befeftle, bu befiefttft, er befielt, mir befehlen. befohlen ordered. b e f i e ft I , id) befttftl. befehlet. S. id) befähle. Thus : cmbfcljlcn to recommend ; Imp. embfat)! , P. p. empfohlen. 17. Serben or Verbergen to hide, to conceal. 3'd) berberge, bu berbirgft, er berbirgt, mir berbergen. berbirg , berberget. id) berbarg. S. id) berbärge. berborgen hidden. The root bergen (to hide) is only used in poetry. 18. 3d) berfte, bu berfteft, er berftet, mir berften :c. 19. $d) bred)e, bu brid)ft, er brid)t, mir brcd)en :c. t Werften berfte, berftet. Srerfjcn brid), brevet. to burst, id) barft. S. id) bärfte. to break, id) brad). S. id) bräd)e. geborften burst. gebrochen broken. Thus: ab'bredjen to break off; au§'brec()en to break out; unter» Bremen to interrupt (P. p. unterbro'd)en) ; jerbredjen to break to pieces, Part, jerbro'djen. *) See p. 135, §4. 1) {Bat.) means: The verb governs the person in the Dative* OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 1 1 162 Lesson 26. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. 20. $rc[rfjen 3d) brefd)e, bu brifd)eft, er brifcf), brifd)t, mir brefdjen jc. brefd)et. 21. f drfdjretfcu x ) (neut.) 3d) erfdjrede (I am fright- | erfdjrid, tened), bu erfd)ridft, er j erfd)redet. erfdjridt, mir erfdjreden. to thrash. id) brafd) or gebroden b r o f d). thrashed. to he frightened, id) e r f d) r a d I erfd)roden I was frigh- I frightened, tened. NB. When erfdjreden 2 ) is an active verb, meaning to frighten some one , it is regular, like the simple verb f djreden. 2 ) 22. ©elteu to be worth or estimated. 3d) gelte, bu giltft, gilt, mir gelten ic. er — id) gait. — S. id) gälte. gegolten. Thus: der gelten to return, to render. P.p. bergolten. 23. ©ebttljreu to bring forth. 3d) gebäre, bu gebierft, fie — id) gebar, gebiert, mir gebären :c. — S. id) gebäre. 24. §elfeu ( JDat .) to help, assist. 3d) fjelfe, bu fjilfft, f)ilft, mir Reifen :c. er hilf, Reifet, Reifen (Sie. id) l)alf. S. id) j^älfe. geboren born. geholfen helped. 25. 9teljmcu to take. 3d) neunte, bu nimm ft, er nimmt, mir nehmen. nimm, id) naf>m. genontntcn nel)men©ie. S. id) näl)me. taken. Thus: ab'neljmen to take off; an'neljtnen to accept; au§'nef)men to except ; l)erau§'ttel)men to take out ; unternehmen to under- take {P.p. unternont'men); toeg'nefmien to take away; juriicl'* nehmen to take back. 26. Sdjelten to scold, chide. 3d) fd)elte, bu f d)iltft, er fd)ilt, mir freiten :c. 27. 3d) fpred)e, bu ft>rid)ft, er fprid)t, mir fpred)en :c. Thus : ou§'fpred)en to pronounce ; enttyre'djen to . tterfpre'djen to promise; toiberfprc'c^en to contradict. 28. Stedjeu to sting. 3d) fted)e, bu ftid)ft, w f d) a 1 1. Weitet. s. id) fd)älte. redjcit to speak. fwW, id) fprad). }|>red)enSie S. id) fprädje. gegolten scolded. gefprod)en spoken, correspond ; ftid)t, mir fted)en :c. er ftW, id) ft ad). ftcc^et. S. id) ftäd)e. geflogen stung. 1) Pronounce erf d) roden. 2) Pronounce erfdjre'clen, fcbreden. Irreg. verbs: 1st Conj. 2nd class. 163 Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part. 0 29. f Steden x ) to stick ( intrans .) 3d) ftede, bu ftidft, er — id) ft ad. geftoden ftieft, wir fteden :c. I stuck. stuck. NB. The active verb fteden 1 2 ) (to put) is regular. 30. Steiften to steal. 3d) ftetjle, bu ftietjlft, er ftieft. id) fta^t. geftofflen fiiep, tüir [testen :c. [testet. S. id) ftatjte. stolen. 31. t Sterben to die. 3d) fterbe, bu ftirbft, er fttrb. id) ftarb. geftorben ftirbt, wir fterben :c. fterbet. S. idj ftärbe.*) | died. 32. Skrbcrben to spoil, to ruin. 3d) Oerberbe, bu oerbirbft. Oerbirb, id) Derbarb. Derborben er oerbirbt, toir oerberben. Derberbet, &id)0erbärbe*) spoiled. 33. Söerbeit to enlist, to sue. 3d) werbe, bu wirbft, er wirb. id) warb. geworben. wirbt, wir werben :c. werbet. S. id) wärbe. 34. Sßcrfeit to throw, fling, cast. 3d) Werfe, bu wirfft, er wirf. id) warf. geworfen wirft, wir werfen :c. werfet. S. id) wärfe. thrown. Thus : ttieg'toetfen to throw away ; Imp. ttmtf . . tocg ; um'toerfen to upset; bertoet'fen to reject; toot'ttierfen to reproach. 3d) treffe, bu trip, er trifft, wir treffen :c. Treffen to hit. triff, treffet. id) traf. 8. id) träfe. getroffen hit. Thus: fein'treffen to arrive; übertref'fen to excel surpass. Imp. übertraf; P. p. übertroffen; an'treffen, (Acc.) and fiju» fam'mentreffen (mit) to meet, to have a meeting. 36. ^Beginnen to begin. 3d) Beginne, bu beginnft, er beginnt, h). beginnen :c. beginne, beginnet. id) begann. S. id) begänne. begonnen begun. 37. ©ewinnen to win, to gain. 3d) gewinne, like beginnen. I gewinne. | id) gen) an n. | gewonnen. 1) Pronounce ftäcfen (e). 2) Pronounce fteden. *) Old form: ftürbe, öerbürbe. 11 164 Lesson 26. Indicative Present. Imperative. Imperfect. a Past Part . o 38. ftimtm to leak, to flow. 3